Sauer Sdfjklmù

PLUS+1™ GUIDE
Software
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
158.2 mm
6.23
144.5 mm
5.69
2x 25.2 mm
142.0 mm [1.0]
[5.59]
97.0 mm
[3.82]
2x ∅7.0
[.28]
MOUNTING
DIRECTION
#2
LED INDICATOR
PIN #1 LIGHTS
INDICATED
51.6 mm
[2.03]
1 6 1 6
12 7 12 7
47.1 mm
[1.85]
CONNECTOR MATES CONNECTOR MATES

WITH DEUTCH WITH DEUTCH
CONNECTOR #DTM-06-125A CONNECTOR #DTM-06-125A
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
About this Manual
Organization To help you quickly find information in this manual, the material is divided into sections,
and Headings topics, subtopics, and details, with descriptive headings set in red type. Section titles
appear at the top of every page in large red type. Topic headings appear in the left-hand
column in bold red type. Subtopic headings appear above the body text in bold red
type and detail headings in italic red type.
References (example: See Topic xyz, page XX) are also formatted in red italic type. In
Portable Document Format (PDF) files, these references are hyperlinks that jump to the
corresponding document pages.
Tables, Illustrations, and Tables, illustrations, and graphics in this manual are identified by titles set in blue italic
Complementary type above each item. Complementary information such as notes, captions, and drawing
Information annotations are also set in blue type.
Special Text Formatting Controls and indicators are set in bold black type.
Black italic type is used in the text to emphasize important information, or to set off words
and terms that are used in an unconventional manner or alternative context.
Table of Contents In the PDF version of this document, the table of contents and index entries are
and Index hyperlinked.
Revision history
Revision Date Comment
Rev CA April 2007
©2007 Sauer-Danfoss. All rights reserved.

Sauer-Danfoss accepts no responsibility for possible errors in catalogs, brochures and other printed material.
Sauer-Danfoss reserves the right to alter its products without prior notice. This also applies to products already
ordered provided that such alterations can be made without affecting agreed specifications.
All trademarks in this material are properties of their respective owners.
PLUS+1, GUIDE, and Sauer-Danfoss are trademarks of the Sauer-Danfoss Group. The PLUS+1 GUIDE, PLUS+1
Compliant, and Sauer-Danfoss logotypes are trademarks of the Sauer-Danfoss Group.
2 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Contents
Risk Reduction .................................................................................................................................................. 9

Design and Test to Reduce Risks......................................................................................................10
Design ...............................................................................................................................................10
Test.....................................................................................................................................................10
Learning About the PLUS+1 GUIDE Program ......................................................................................11

Lesson 1: Create an Application .......................................................................................................12
Lesson 2: Download an Application................................................................................................24
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window ..............................................................................................................................29

PLUS+1 GUIDE Window Elements...................................................................................................30
About the PLUS+1 GUIDE Window .........................................................................................32
About PLUS+1 GUIDE Application Templates.....................................................................34
About Route Names .....................................................................................................................35
Menus........................................................................................................................................................36
Toolbar......................................................................................................................................................43
Plotter Output Setup Window ..........................................................................................................47
Options Window....................................................................................................................................50
View Logical Net Window...................................................................................................................54
Hardware Tab .........................................................................................................................................55
Search Window ..............................................................................................................................57
Project Manager Tab ............................................................................................................................58
About the Project Manager and Hardware Tabs ................................................................60
Page Navigator Tab ..............................................................................................................................62
Component Tab.....................................................................................................................................63
Function Tab ...........................................................................................................................................64
My Blocks Tab .........................................................................................................................................65
Inspector Tab ..........................................................................................................................................66
Compiler Messages Tabs ....................................................................................................................67
Data Types .......................................................................................................................................................69

Data Types ...............................................................................................................................................70
About Overflow Conditions...............................................................................................................71
About the Time Base Data Type .......................................................................................................72
Resolution........................................................................................................................................73
About the Array Data Type ................................................................................................................74
Components ...................................................................................................................................................75
Context-Sensitive Help for Components ......................................................................................76
About Component Descriptions......................................................................................................77
Mathematical..........................................................................................................................................79
Arithmetic ........................................................................................................................................80
Absolute Value ...............................................................................................................................92
Scale...................................................................................................................................................94
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 3

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Contents
Trigonometric................................................................................................................................. 98
Square Root...................................................................................................................................105
Limit .........................................................................................................................................................106
Max/Min .........................................................................................................................................107
Compare.................................................................................................................................................116
Compare.........................................................................................................................................117
Compare with Hysteresis..........................................................................................................123
Compare in Window ..................................................................................................................129
Constant .................................................................................................................................................131
True/False ......................................................................................................................................132
Digit Autotype..............................................................................................................................134
Typed...............................................................................................................................................137
Logical.....................................................................................................................................................142
AND2–AND5 .................................................................................................................................143
OR2–OR8........................................................................................................................................144
NOT ..................................................................................................................................................145
XOR ..................................................................................................................................................146
Bitwise.............................................................................................................................................147
Shift..................................................................................................................................................150
Position...........................................................................................................................................152
Set/Reset Latch ............................................................................................................................155
Data Flip-Flop ...............................................................................................................................157
Switch, Counter, Memory.................................................................................................................159
Switch Boolean Controlled ......................................................................................................160
Switch..............................................................................................................................................163
Counter...........................................................................................................................................168
Value Connect ..............................................................................................................................175
Memory ..........................................................................................................................................179
Array ........................................................................................................................................................183
Get Array Element.......................................................................................................................184
Set Array Element........................................................................................................................186
Length of Array ............................................................................................................................188
Delete Array Elements ...............................................................................................................189
Insert Array Elements.................................................................................................................191
Copy of Array ................................................................................................................................193
Find Array.......................................................................................................................................194
Array Constant from File...........................................................................................................195
Data Conversion ..................................................................................................................................197
Decode/Encode ...........................................................................................................................198
Split ..................................................................................................................................................204
Combine.........................................................................................................................................205
Swap ................................................................................................................................................206
Retype .............................................................................................................................................207
Transition, Time ...................................................................................................................................208
Transition .......................................................................................................................................209
Delay................................................................................................................................................212
Oscillator ........................................................................................................................................217
Pulse ................................................................................................................................................219
Example—Pulse...........................................................................................................................220
4 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Contents
Time Base ...................................................................................................................................... 221

Measure Period ........................................................................................................................... 223
Connection ........................................................................................................................................... 224
Checkpoint ................................................................................................................................... 225
Set Value........................................................................................................................................ 231
Hardware....................................................................................................................................... 232
CAN ................................................................................................................................................. 242
Non-Volatile Memory Dynamic ............................................................................................. 253
Module................................................................................................................................................... 260
Module Single Wire ................................................................................................................... 261
Module Bus................................................................................................................................... 263
Call Module................................................................................................................................... 264
Manage .................................................................................................................................................. 267
Generate Compiler Error on Range ...................................................................................... 268
Generate Compiler Error on Not Constant ........................................................................ 269
Generate Compiler Error on Type......................................................................................... 270
Predefine Type ............................................................................................................................ 271
Access..................................................................................................................................................... 273
Access App Log Enable ............................................................................................................ 274
Disable Raw Applog Data Readout ...................................................................................... 274
Accessrights App Log Diagnostics ....................................................................................... 275
Accessrights App Log Errors................................................................................................... 276
Accessrights App Log Others ................................................................................................. 277
Accessrights History .................................................................................................................. 278
Accessrights Read ...................................................................................................................... 279
Accessrights Write...................................................................................................................... 280
Read-only Parameter......................................................................................................................... 285
Open Parameter Set .................................................................................................................. 286
Close Parameter Set .................................................................................................................. 287
Connection................................................................................................................................... 288
Example—Read-only Parameter Input with Namespace............................................. 291
Display.................................................................................................................................................... 292
Define Window ........................................................................................................................... 293
Line.................................................................................................................................................. 295
Graphic........................................................................................................................................... 297
Text Label...................................................................................................................................... 299
Graphic Label............................................................................................................................... 300
String .............................................................................................................................................. 301
Text Set .......................................................................................................................................... 309
Define Areas Page ...................................................................................................................... 314
Define Screen Page.................................................................................................................... 314
Application Log................................................................................................................................... 315
Language Definition Input...................................................................................................... 315
Select Language ......................................................................................................................... 315
Define Application Log Areas Page...................................................................................... 315
Define Application Log Page.................................................................................................. 315
Page ........................................................................................................................................................ 316
Basic Page ..................................................................................................................................... 316
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 5

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Contents
Screen Editor.................................................................................................................................................317
About the Screen Editor....................................................................................................................318
Screen Editor Elements .....................................................................................................................319
Define Areas Page ...............................................................................................................................321
Define Areas Page/Inspector Tab ..........................................................................................323
Define Screen Page.............................................................................................................................330
Define Screen Page/Add Library Items................................................................................332
Define Screen Page/Inspector Tab........................................................................................333
Define Screen Page/Image Register .....................................................................................339
Define Screen Page/Text Register .........................................................................................342
PLUS+1—How To........................................................................................................................................345
Select .......................................................................................................................................................346
Undo Your Mistakes ...........................................................................................................................346
Zoom with the Mouse .......................................................................................................................347
Zoom with Keystrokes.......................................................................................................................347
Delete a Single Item ...........................................................................................................................348
Delete Many Items ..............................................................................................................................349
Delete a Signal-to-Bus Connection ...............................................................................................350
Refresh a View ......................................................................................................................................351
View a Full Page...................................................................................................................................351
Pan a View by Right-Clicking and Dragging ..............................................................................352
Pan a View by Right-Clicking...........................................................................................................352
Navigate an Application with Buttons .........................................................................................353
Navigate an Application with the Page Navigator tab...........................................................353
Show and Hide Panes ........................................................................................................................354
Install a Hardware Description........................................................................................................355
Change Properties with the Inspector Tab.................................................................................357
Change Properties with the Pop-up Edit Window...................................................................358
Create a Page........................................................................................................................................359
Page Creation Overview ...........................................................................................................360
Page Creation Procedure..........................................................................................................361
Page Interface Editor View—Toolbar...................................................................................363
Create a Read-only Parameters File ..............................................................................................373
About the CSV Template File Format ...................................................................................382
Screen Editor—How To.............................................................................................................................383

Start a Screen Editor Project ............................................................................................................384
Define Areas Page/Assign a Hardware Port ...............................................................................387
Define Areas Page/Assign More Screen Areas ..........................................................................388
Define Areas Page/Rename a Screen Area .................................................................................389
Define Areas Page/Delete a Screen Area ....................................................................................390
Define Areas Page/Change Screen Area Properties ................................................................391
Define Areas Page/Initialize Signal-Enabled Screen Areas ...................................................393
Define Screen Page/Assign a Screen Area..................................................................................394
Define Screen Page/Delete a Screen Area..................................................................................395
Define Screen Page/Create Bar Graphs .......................................................................................396
6 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Contents
Define Screen Page/Create a Text Group................................................................................... 397

Define Screen Page/Use the Default Language Setting ....................................................... 399
How to Change the Default Language ............................................................................... 399
Define Screen Page/Switch between Different Languages................................................. 400
Define Screen Page/Display a Data Value.................................................................................. 401
Define Screen Page/Format a Data Value .................................................................................. 402
Define Screen Page/Display an Image List ................................................................................ 404
Define Screen Page/Display a Text List....................................................................................... 409
Define Screen Page/Install Additional Fonts ............................................................................ 414
Define Screen Page/Display a Non-Roman Alphabet............................................................ 420
Define Screen Page/Display Video ............................................................................................... 425
Define Screen Page/Print a Screen............................................................................................... 427
Keyboard Shortcuts and Command Modifiers ................................................................................. 431

Keyboard Shortcuts ........................................................................................................................... 432
Command Modifiers.......................................................................................................................... 434
Page Layout Guidelines............................................................................................................................ 437

Page Guidelines .................................................................................................................................. 438
Port Label Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 440
Port Label Unit Abbreviations........................................................................................................ 441
Index ............................................................................................................................................................... 443
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 7

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Contents
8 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Risk Reduction
This chapter explains the importance of designing and testing applications developed
with the PLUS+1™ GUIDE™ program to reduce the risk of personal injury and equipment
damage.
Chapter contents Design and Test to Reduce Risks..............................................................................................................10

Design................................................................................................................................................................10
Test .....................................................................................................................................................................10
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 9

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Risk Reduction
Design and Test to Reduce Risks

The applications that you create with the PLUS+1 GUIDE program typically control heavy,
powerful, and mobile off-road equipment such as tractors, cranes, and harvesters.
Under normal operating conditions, using this type of machinery always involves the risk
of personal injury and equipment damage. Abnormal operating conditions greatly
increase the risk of personal injury and equipment damage.
The PLUS+1 GUIDE program has no automatic protections against these risks. The tool
also has no protection against the risks that result from bugs in the tool software, errors in
the tool manual, or incompatibilities between software versions of the tool.
You must design and test your application to reduce these risks.
Design
You have the responsibility when you design a PLUS+1 GUIDE application to include the
fault checking and the error handling needed to reduce risks in normal and abnormal
operating conditions.
The following are some items to consider when developing fault checking and error
handling for your application:
• How the machine is normally used.
• Possible operator errors and their consequences.
• Industry safety standards and legal requirements.
• Input and output failures and their consequences. These failures can include:
− Joystick, sensor, and other inputs suddenly going to 100 % or to 0 %.

− Outputs that control machinery direction, speed, and force suddenly changing
direction or going to 100 % or to 0 %.
Decide how likely each failure is. The more likely a failure, the more you need to
protect against the consequences of the failure.
• The sequence of events and consequences of a fault or error.
• The sequence of events and consequences of an emergency stop.
Test
You have the responsibility once you have created an application to test the application.
You should download your application to hardware and test its operation under both
normal and abnormal operating conditions. You should make sure that:
• Individual inputs produce expected outputs.
• Fault handling and error checking work as designed.
10 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Learning About the PLUS+1 GUIDE Program
This chapter contains two basic lessons to help you learn about the PLUS+1 GUIDE
program and the PLUS+1 Service Tool program.
These two lessons will help you to understand:
• How to create, open, and save a PLUS+1 GUIDE project.
• Major features of the PLUS+1 GUIDE window.
• How to use a PLUS+1 GUIDE template to create an application.
• Basic PLUS+1 GUIDE keystrokes and program commands.
• How to use the PLUS+1 Service Tool program to download an application to an MC24-
10 Series Controller.
Getting ready • To complete Lesson 1, you need a fully functional version of the PLUS+1 GUIDE
program installed on your PC. (This is a self-contained lesson; you do not have to go
on to Lesson 2.)
• To complete Lesson 2, you need the following hardware:
− One MC024-010 PLUS+1 Controller (part 10100899).

− One PLUS+1 CAN/USB Gateway and cabling (part 1091099).
− One 12–24 VDC 500 mA power supply.
Mouse/keyboard actions Left-click the mouse Right-click the mouse
Left-click and drag the mouse Right-click and the drag mouse
/ Press the Enter key on your Keyboard 4 Press the F4 key on your keyboard
l Press the L key on your Keyboard e Press the E key on your keyboard
The figures in these lessons use symbols that indicate mouse and keyboard actions. The
preceding figure explains these symbols.
Mouse or keyboard You can do most PLUS+1 tasks using either a mouse or a keyboard. To keep things simple,
these lessons typically show only one way to do a task.
More information For more information about some of the basic procedures described here see PLUS+1—
How To on page 345.
T The screen captures shown in this chapter may be slightly different from the
appearances of screens in your version of the PLUS+1 program.
Lesson 1: Create an Application ...............................................................................................................12

Lesson 2: Download an Application........................................................................................................24
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 11

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Lesson 1: Create an Application
On: 0.4 s
Off: 0.6 s
In this lesson, you create and compile an application that, when downloaded, blinks the
green LED on a MC024-10 controller on for 0.4 s and off for 0.6 s.
1. Start the PLUS+1 GUIDE program and create a new PLUS+1 project folder.
A. Start the PLUS+1 GUIDE program.
B. In the toolbar of the PLUS+1 GUIDE window, click the New Project button to
display the Create New Project window.
C. In the Create New Project window, name your project Blink LED.
D. Click to display the Browse for Folder window.
E. Use the Browse for Folder window to create a project destination folder named
Blink LED.
Each PLUS+1 project requires its own project folder.
12 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
B E
2. Get the PLUS+1 GUIDE window ready to select the hardware files and the application
template needed to create an application for the MC24-010 Controller.
A. In the View menu, click Default Layout to display the Manager, Selector, and
Compiler panes.
B. Click Project Manager to display this tab.
C. Click to close the Inspector tab.
D. Click to close the Compiler pane.
E. Click to display the Hardware tab.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 13

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
3. Click and drag the MC24-10 Hardware Description and Template from the Hardware
tab to the Project Manager tab.
A. In the Hardware tab, fully expand the Programmable Hardware file tree to view
all the Controllers in this tree.
B. Click and drag the Hardware Description for the MC24-10 Controller from the
Hardware tab to the Project Manager tab.
C. Click and drag the Template for the MC 24-10 Controller from the Hardware tab
to the Project tab.
D. In the Replace Main Module window, click OK to rename the module

MC24_10T.SCS.
MC24-10 Controller Template
The Drawing Area now displays a template for creating an application for an
MC24-10 Controllers. This template has predefined inputs, outputs, and memory
locations that match hardware on the MC24-10 Controller. (Different releases of
this template look slightly different.)
14 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
C
A
D
E
E
F
G
...
B
4. Enter the Application page of the template. Select the components needed to
construct an oscillator.
A. In the toolbar, click the Enter Page button.
B. Drag at a port on the Application page to enter this page.
C. Click to display the Component tab.
The Component tab organizes components logically by function.
D. Click to view all the Constant components.
E. Drag these two Constant components into the Application page:
– 3 Digit Auto-type (two)
– True
F. Click to view all the Transition and Time components.
G. Drag these two Transition and Time components into the Application page:
– Oscillator
– Time Base
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 15

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
B connect
Connection made
C
90º
Step BDetail
connect
D
Connections made
Step CDetail
5. Wire the components that you have placed in the Application page together.
You may find it useful to zoom in or out on your work.

A. In the toolbar, click the Route Wire/Bus button.
B. Click to start a wire from the topmost 3 Digit Auto-type constant.

As needed, press n
to force a connection.
The yellow square highlights the connection that you have just made.
The smaller white square on the wire indicates where you will connect this wire to
the P (Period) pin on the Oscillator.
Click to route the wire at a 90º angle.
C. Click to connect the wire to the P pin on the Oscillator.
A small asterisk-like shape (*) appears at each end of the wire to indicate a
successful connection between the two components.
D. Wire the other components to match the connections shown in this picture.
(Straight wires are not necessary in this lesson.)
16 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
T The next step uses the pop-up Edit Value window, which the PLUS+1 Program
enables by default. Use the Options window to enable and disable the pop-up Edit
Value window.
The path to the Options window is Setup menu > Options > Options window >
General > check Pop-up Editor window for components.
A
A
B
D /
6. Use the Edit Value window to apply values to the 3 Digit Auto-type and Time Base
constants.
A. Click the Query/Change button in the toolbar.
B. Click the ? in the topmost constant to display the Edit Value window.
C. In the Edit Value window that displays, type a value of 10.
D. Press / to give this constant a value of 10.

E. Apply the values shown in the above figure to the other constants.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 17

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
On
Output
T
Off
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 3000
Time (ms)
The values that you enter in this step produce the oscillator output shown in the
preceding figure.
• The T100M value applied to the Unit input on the Oscillator sets a 100 ms time base.
• The 4 value applied to the T (Time) input on the Oscillator sets an on time of 400 ms
(4 x 100 ms time base = 400 ms).
• The 10 value applied to the P (Period) input on the Oscillator sets a period of 1000 ms
(10 x 100 ms time base = 1000 ms).
• The T (true) value enables the Oscillator output.
Outputs bus
A
B C
D
45º
7. Wire the output of the Oscillator to the Outputs bus.

A green wire carries a single signal. A red bus carries multiple signals, typically
between pages in an application.
You get a red multi-signal bus when you start routing (drawing) from a bus. You get a
green single signal wire when you start routing from a single signal source.
B. Connect the Oscillator output to the Outputs bus.
Click the Oscillator output pin to start the wire.
18 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Just before the wire reaches the Outputs bus, click to angle the wire into the
Outputs bus at a 45º angle.
Connecting a wire to a bus at a 45º angle keeps the wire from hiding the wire
name.
The Select/Define Member Name window displays when you make the
connection at the Outputs bus.
C. In the Select/Define Member Name window, name the Oscillator output signal
Green_LED.
D. Click OK to dismiss the Select/Define Member Name window.

Application page
A
Top Level page
B
C
Outputs page
OS page
8. Navigate to the OS page.
The OS page is a sub-page nested within the OUTPUTS page. About PLUS+1 GUIDE
Application Templates on page 34 shows a typical template page structure).
A signal applied to the operating system output of the controller flashes the LED.
A. In the toolbar, click the Leave Page button to leave the APPLICATION page and
return to the Top Level page.
B. In the toolbar, click the Enter page button.
C. Drag at an OUTPUTS page port to enter the OUTPUTS page.
D. Drag at an OS page port to enter the OS page.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 19

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
OS page
You can also use the Page Navigator tab to go directly to the OS page.
B D
* = Will be deleted
- = Will not be deleted
E 4
9. Delete the constant True that is applied to the LED_GREEN.
This True keeps the green LED on the controller constantly on.
A. In the toolbar, click the Delete button.
B. Click and drag to select the True component. Releasing the mouse displays the
Select Item Class window.
C. In the Select Item Class window, click Toggle ON<->OFF and put:
– An asterisk (*) next to Component to delete the True component.
– A dash (-) next to WireBusSeg to not delete the wire.
D. Click OK to delete the True component.

E. Press 4 to refresh the Drawing Area view.
20 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
45º
10. Route the Green_LED signal to the LED_GREEN port.
The OUTPUTS bus carries the Green_LED signal. The Oscillator on the APPLICATION
page puts this signal on the bus.
B. Connect the LED_GREEN wire segment to the OUTPUTS bus.
– Click the X on the wire end and pull this wire toward the OUTPUTS bus.
– Click to angle the wire into the OUTPUTS bus at a 45º angle.
– Click the OUTPUTS bus. This displays the Select/Define Member Name
window that lists all signals carried by this bus.
C. In the Select/Define Member Name window, click OK to connect this signal to

the LED_GREEN port.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 21

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Compiler messages
11. Compile the application into an LHX format file that you can download.
A. In the toolbar, click the Compile All button to start the compile process.
The Compile pane at the bottom of the PLUS+1 GUIDE window opens to display
the Build Messages tab. This tab displays compiler progress messages.
The Compile Progress window displays during the compile process and indicates
success or failure of the compile process.
B. Click OK to close the Compile Progress window.

12. If you do not have the hardware and cabling needed to download this application,
continue on to step 13 on page 23.
If you have the hardware and cabling needed to download this application, skip ahead
to Lesson 2: Download an Application on page 24.
22 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
13. Exit the PLUS+1 GUIDE program.
A. In the File menu, click Exit.
B. In the Compressed Format window, click OK to compress the project files into a
PLUS+1 Packed (PIP) format file.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 23

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Lesson 2: Download an Application

The PLUS+1 GUIDE program also includes a PLUS+1 Service Tool program. You use this
program to:
− Download an application to PLUS+1 programmable hardware.

− Download parameters (operating values) to PLUS+1 programmable hardware.
− Log PLUS+1 programmable hardware performance.
9-pin connector USB connector

PWR
CAN
CG150 Communicator
Pin 5 Connector 2
Pin 9
Pin 1 Pin 6
Pin 12 Pin 1
DetailsCommunicator 9-Pin Connector

Single notch
MC024-10 Controller
Pin 6 Connector 1
DetailsMC024-10 Connector 1
The following procedure uses a CG150 CAN/USB Gateway Interface Communicator and a
PLUS+1 MC024-10 Controller.
• The USB connector on the CG150 connects to the USB port on your PC.
• Use the following table as a guide when making the remaining connections on the
CG150 Communicator and MC-024-10 Controller.
CG150 Communicator/MC024-10 Controller connections
Function CG150 Communicator 9 Pin Connector MC024-10 Controller Connector 1
CAN+ Pin 7 Pin 3
CAN- Pin 2 Pin 4
CAN shield/ground Pin 3 Pin 5
Controller power supply voltage + —— Pin 2
Controller power supply ground – —— Pin 1
Controller power supply ground – —— Pin 1
24 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
1. Set up and connect the hardware needed to download the application to the
controller.
Successful connection
Connection error
2. Start the PLUS+1 Service Tool program.
A. In the PLUS+1 GUIDE window toolbar, click the PLUS+1 Service Tool button.
You can also start this program through the Start menu on your PC.
B. In the Communications menu, check that the Settings command selects the
CG150 Communicator.
C. If the Confirm window displays, click Yes to scan the hardware.

Scanning reads hardware, application, and history information stored in the
hardware memory.
The Status bar at the bottom of the PLUS+1 Service Tool window indicates that
the CG150 Communicator has successfully connected the PLUS+1 Service Tool
with the controller.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 25

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
C
B
3. Prepare to download the Blink LED.lhx file to the controller.
A. In the Service Tool window toolbar, click the File Download button.
Clicking this button displays the File Download window.
B. In the File Download window, click to select the target ECU.
(In a project that uses more than one controller, you will have more than one
choice.)
C. In the File Download window, click OK.
D. In the Open Application File for Download window, browse to and click the
Blink LED.lhx file.
E. In the Open Application File for Download window, click Open to load the Blink
LED .lhx file for downloading.
26 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Status
4. Download the Blink LED.lhx file to the controller.
In the File Download tab, click the Start Download button to begin the download.
The Status bar at the bottom of the window shows:
− Download during the download.

− Connect before and after the download finishes.
The PLUS+1 Service Tool program automatically rescans the controller when the
download completes.
On: 0.4 s
Off: 0.6 s
Once downloaded, the application starts flashing the green LED on the controller.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 27

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
5. Exit the PLUS+1 Service Tool program and the PLUS+1 GUIDE program.
A. In the PLUS+1 Service Tool window’s File menu, click Exit to exit the PLUS+1
Service Tool program.
28 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
This chapter describes the major elements in the PLUS+1 GUIDE window.
Chapter contents PLUS+1 GUIDE Window Elements ...........................................................................................................30

About the PLUS+1 GUIDE Window .........................................................................................................32
About PLUS+1 GUIDE Application Templates.....................................................................................34
About Route Names .....................................................................................................................................35
Menus................................................................................................................................................................36
Toolbar ..............................................................................................................................................................43
Plotter Output Setup Window ..................................................................................................................43
Options Window............................................................................................................................................50
View Logical Net Window...........................................................................................................................54
Hardware Tab..................................................................................................................................................55
Search Window ..............................................................................................................................................57
Project Manager Tab ....................................................................................................................................58
About the Project Manager and Hardware Tabs ................................................................................60
Page Navigator Tab.......................................................................................................................................62
Component Tab .............................................................................................................................................63
Function Tab ...................................................................................................................................................64
My Blocks Tab .................................................................................................................................................65
Inspector Tab ..................................................................................................................................................66
Compiler Messages Tabs.............................................................................................................................67
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 29

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window Elements

Menus
Toolbar
Manager
Selector
Drawing Area
Inspector
Preview
Compiler
Messages
This window displays when you start the PLUS+1 GUIDE program. Use this window to
create applications that you can download to PLUS+1 hardware.
PLUS+1 GUIDE window elements

Item Description
Menus Use the menu bar to access PLUS+1 GUIDE commands and information.
Toolbar Use the toolbar to access common PLUS+1 GUIDE commands and information.
Selector This pane has a Hardware tab, a Component tab with a Preview pane, and a Function tab.
Hardware tab—Shows a tree view of Hardware Descriptions for each PLUS+1 hardware device. These Hardware
Descriptions link to the resources needed by the PLUS+1 GUIDE program to create and compile applications for specific
PLUS+1 hardware models.
Component tab—Shows a tree view of components that you can drag into the Drawing Area when creating your
application.
Preview pane—Displays a preview of the selected component.
Function—Shows a tree view of functions that you can drag into the Drawing Area when building your application
module.
30 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
PLUS+1 GUIDE window elements

Item Description
Manager This pane has a Project Manager tab and a Page Navigator tab.
Project Manager tab—Shows a tree view of the Hardware Description dragged over from the Hardware tab. You must
install a Hardware Description before you can create an application for a PLUS+1 hardware model.
Page Navigator tab—Shows a tree view of all the pages within an application module. Click to display a selected page in
the Drawing Area.
Drawing Area Create your application module here.
Inspector Use this tab to view and change the properties of items that you select with the Query/Change command.
Compiler Messages This pane contains a Build Messages tab, an Error Messages tab, and a Compiler Messages tab.
Build Messages tab—Displays messages from the compiler as it compiles your application into a downloadable LHX
format file.
Error Messages tab—Displays details about errors in the compile process.
Compiler Messages tab—Displays messages sent to the compiler log file.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 31

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
About the PLUS+1 GUIDE Window

Displays the Compiler panel Displays the Selector panel
Displays the Inspector panel
Manager panel:
Manage project files, Displays the Navigator panel Selector panel:
navigate project pages Select hardware,
Displays the Manager panel components, functions
Drag to resize panels
Click to lock panels
Click to close panels

Drawing Area: Create
Drag to undock panels your application here
Command selection
Compiler panel:
Crosshair position
View compiler messages
Inspector panel:
View and change values
• The Selector pane (on the right of this window) has Hardware, Component, and
Function tabs.
− Use the Hardware tab to select the files needed to create and compile an
application for different models of PLUS+1 hardware.
− Use the Component tab to select the basic components used within in your
application, such as AND gates.
32 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
− Use the Function tab to select the advanced functions used within your
application, such as a Soft Ramp.
• The Manager pane (on the left of this window) has Project Manager and Page
Navigator tabs.
− The Project Manager tab displays the files dragged from the Hardware tab.
− The Page Navigator navigates you through the pages in the application.
• The Compiler pane (at the bottom of this window) displays compiler messages.
• You can close, resize, and undock these panes.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 33

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
About PLUS+1 GUIDE Application Templates
Top Level Pages in an Application Template
An application Template contains a hierarchy of pages that logically organize application

functions. Each PLUS+1 hardware model has its own Template.
A thin blue line (—) indicates the boundary of the page that you are currently viewing.
A thick light blue line ( ) indicates the border of any pages nested within the page that you
are currently viewing.
You can also create your own pages—see Page Creation Procedure on page 361.
Typically, the top-level page of an application Template for a controller has five pages:
• Unit Config page—Defines the Controller Area Network (CAN) Node and Net.
• CAN Config page—Sets the CAN baud.
• Inputs page—Has sub-pages that define input functions such as CAN

communication, controller pin inputs, and operating system inputs.
• Application page—Contains the page where you create the controller application.
• Outputs page—Has sub-pages that define output related functions such as CAN
communication, controller pin outputs, and operating system outputs.
34 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
About Route Names

Every route (either a green single signal wire or a red multi-signal bus) in a PLUS+1 GUIDE
application must have a name.
The Select/Define Member Name window displays when you connect a route. Enter your
signal names in this window.
When naming routes, observe the following rules:
• Always begin a signal name with a capital letter.
Correct: Incorrect:
Green_LED green_LED
• Do not start a signal name with a number.
Correct: Incorrect:
Green_LED_1 1_Green_LED
• Underscore (_) spaces in signal names.
Correct: Incorrect:
Green_LED Green LED
• A–Z, a–z, and 0–9 are valid signal name characters.
• Signal names are case-sensitive: Green_LED and GREEN_LED are the names of two
different signals.
• Signal names can be up to 16 characters long.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 35

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
Menus
New Project Undo Enter Page Compile All

Open Project Redo Leave Page Compile Changed
Open Recent Move Refresh Error Check All
Save Project Stretch Set Center Error Check Changed
Save Project As Delete Move View
Close Project Delete All Zoom
Save Drawing Copy/Repeat Manager
In
Save Drawing As Query/Change Page Navigator Out
Close Drawing Symbol in Place Inspector Area
Block Highlight Connections Compiler Messages Fit Page
Page Remove Highlighting Selector 100%
Screen Capture Default Layout
Print Import Block Toolbars
Exit Export Block Help Contents
Import Page User Manual
Export Page Release Notes
Create Troubleshooting File
About PLUS+1 GUIDE
Text
Toggle Display Grid Page PLUS+1 Service Tool
Thin Line
Layers Visible Layers Page Interface Editor Optimize Nets
Active Layers Thin Line Path
Display Port Wire View Logical Net
Thick Line
Backup Folder Port Bus View Net Names
Route Wire/Bus Thick Line Path
Backup Interval License Manager
Repeat Connection Small Arc
Install Hardware
Text/Vector Graphics Large Arc
Install Function Library
Circle
Uninstall Hardware Graphics and Text
Drawing Area Pointer Two-point Circle
Uninstall Function Library
Install Font Color Schemes Filled Circle
Uninstall Font Rectangle
Tools Palette Filled Rectangle
Options Filled Polygon

Filled Polygon Cut
Use the menu bar to access PLUS+1 GUIDE commands.
T Toolbar buttons duplicate commonly used menu commands. See Toolbar on page 43
for more about the toolbar buttons.
36 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
Menu
Item Description
File The commands in this menu manage project files.
New Project Displays the Create New Project window.

Use this window to name a new project and to create a folder for the project files.
Open Project Displays the Open Project window.

Use this window to locate and open P1P and P1X format project files.
Open Recent Displays a list of recently saved projects. Select a project to open from this list.
Save Project Saves the current project files without zipping them into a single PIP format file.
Save Project As Displays the Save Project As window.

Use this window to save the current project under a new name and in a new folder.
Close Project Closes the current project without exiting the PLUS+1 GUIDE program.
Displays a Project Modified window and a Save in PIP window.
Use the Project Modified window to save or discard any changes that you have made in your project.
Use the Save in PIP window to compress project files into single PIP format file.
Save Drawing Saves the application drawing as an SCS format file, using the module name.
Save Drawing As Displays the Select/Define New Job File Name window.
Use this window to save the application drawing as an SCS format file, under a new name.
Close Drawing Closes the current application drawing without closing the project.
Block Import Block—Displays the Load Block Utility Binary window.

Use this window to select an SCS format file and import its contents into the Drawing Area.
This command does not work with Define Areas and Define Screen blocks. Importing blocks into a new
project strips the blocks of their contents.
Export Block—Displays the Symbol Block Export Binary window after you select items for export in the
Drawing Area.
Use this window to export the selected items to an SCS format file.
Page Import Page—Displays the Select Job File Name window after you select a page in the Drawing Area.
Use this window to select an SCS format file and import its contents into the selected page.
Export Page—Displays the Select/Define New Job File Name window after you select a page in the Drawing
Area.
This command does not work with Define Areas and Define Screen blocks. Importing blocks into a new
project strips the blocks of their contents.
Use this window to export the contents of the selected page to an SCS format file.
Screen Capture Displays the Select Screen Dump Format window after you select items in the Drawing Area.
Use this window to save the selected items to a BMP or TIFF format file or as a BMP capture to the clipboard.
Print Displays the Plotter Output Setup window.

Use this window to print out pages from the application.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 37

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
Menu
Item Description
Exit Closes the PLUS+1 GUIDE program.

Closing the application displays a Project Modified window and then a Save in PIP window.
Use the Project Modified window to choose to save or discard changes that you have made in your project.
Use the Save in PIP window to compress project files into a single PIP format file.
Edit The commands in this menu change and modify items in the Drawing Area.
Undo Reverses programming actions.

Depending on computer memory, you can undo up to ten actions.
Redo Reverses Undo commands.

Depending on computer memory, you can reverse up to ten Undo commands.
The Options window enables and disables the undo/redo function. To display this window, click Options in
the Setup menu.
Move Moves items that you select.
Stretch Moves items that you select and stretches segments in routes that you select.
Stretch adds a vertex to a selected route segment. You can move this vertex without changing the positions of
the other vertexes on the route.
Delete Deletes items that you select in the Drawing Area. Selected items turn white.
The Attributes window displays when you select an individual item or identical items. Click OK to delete your
selection.
The Select Item Class window displays when you select several different items. Use this window to select the
items that you want to delete. Asterisks (*) identify items that will be deleted; dashes (-) identify items that will
not be deleted.
Delete All Deletes all items in within a page, including template elements.
Copy/Repeat Copies what you select. Items selected for copying in the Drawing Area turn white. Clicking places copied
items.
This command only works within the currently displayed page. Use the Block and Page commands in the File
menu to copy items to other pages.
Query/Change Use to change the properties of items that you select. White text or red text typically indicates a property that
you can change.
Make your changes using either the Inspector tab or the pop-up Edit Value window to make the change.
Symbol in Place Displays a selected page in the Page Interface Editor. Use this Editor to change the pins, text, and graphic
elements that define the appearance of the selected page.
Highlight Connections Use to check wire/bus connections in a page.

Selecting a segment highlights (turns white) all segments that connect to your selected segment.
Remove Highlighting Turns off the highlighting applied to the connected segments.
View The commands in this menu change what you view in the Drawing Area.
Enter Page Enters a selected page.

On pages that have ports, drag on a port to enter the page.
On new pages that do not yet have ports, drag on a page border to enter the page.
38 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
Menu
Item Description
Leave Page Leaves the current page.
Refresh Refreshes the Drawing Area view.
Set Center Centers the Drawing Area view on where you click the pointer.
Move View Homes a zoomed-in page to fit entirely within the Drawing Area. A white-bordered rectangle outlines the area
in which the zoom focused.
Click the pointer on the spot where you want to recenter your zoom.
Zoom In—Zooms in, centering the view where you click the pointer.
Out—Zooms out, centering the view where you click the pointer.
Area—Zooms into a rectangular area whose size you define by clicks of the pointer.
Fit Page—Resizes the page (defined by its blue boundary lines) to fit within the Drawing Area.
100 %—Zooms to a view that is midway between the minimum and maximum zoom views.
Manager Toggles the display of a locked Manager pane that has a Project Manager tab and a Page Navigator tab.
Project Manager tab—Displays a tree view of the Hardware Descriptions that you installed to create and
compile an application.
You select Hardware Descriptions in the Hardware tab and drag them to this tab.
Page Navigator Contains a tree view of the pages in your application module. Click a page name in the view to display the
selected page in the Drawing Area.
Inspector Toggles the display of a locked Inspector tab.

Use this tab to view and change the properties of the items that you select with the Query/Change tool.
Compiler Messages Toggles the display of a locked pane that has a Compiler Messages tab, an Error Messages tab, and a Build
Messages tab. These tabs display compiler messages.
Compiler Messages tab—Displays the compiler messages that log to the Screen.tmp file, located in the
project folder.
Error Messages tab—Displays compiler error messages. Errors stop the compile process.
Build Messages tab—Displays messages from the compiler as it compiles your application into a
downloadable file.
Selector Toggles the display of a locked Selector pane that has a Hardware tab, a Component tab containing a
Preview pane, and a Function tab.
Hardware tab—Displays a tree view of Hardware Descriptions for specific PLUS+1 models.
Each Hardware Description links to the resources needed to create and compile a downloadable file for a
specific PLUS+1 hardware model. Drag Hardware Descriptions from here into the Project Manager tab.
Component tab—Displays a tree view of components that you can use to build your application. Drag
components into the Drawing Area.
The Preview pane shows a preview of the selected component.
Function tab—Displays a tree view of the higher-level functions that you can use in your application. Drag
the functions into the Drawing Area.
Default Layout Toggles the default layout display.

In the default layout, the PLUS+1 GUIDE window locks and displays the Manager and Inspector panes on
the left, the Compiler pane on the bottom, and the Selector pane on the right.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 39

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
Menu
Item Description
Toolbars Toggles the display of button sets for the File, Edit, View, Compile, Add, and Help functions.
Compile The commands in this menu control the compile functions.
Compile All Compiles all application modules to produce a downloadable file.
Compile Changed Compiles only the modules that you changed since the last Compile All.
Use this command to save compile time when you have more than one module.
Error Check All Compiles to check for errors in all modules.

The Error Check All and Error Check Changed commands do not produce downloadable files.
Error Check Changed Compiles to check for errors only in the modules that you changed since the last Compile All.
Stop Compile Stops all compile processes.
Setup The commands in this menu set up the PLUS+1 programming environment.
Toggle Display Grid Turns the Drawing Area grid on and off.
Layers Visible Layers—Displays the Define Visible/Define Invisible Objects/Layers window.

Use this window to select classes of objects—such as components or routes—that the PLUS+1 GUIDE
program shows or hides in the Drawing Area.
Active Layers—This PLUS+1 GUIDE release does not support this feature.
Display Graphics and Text—Displays the Define Drawing Mode Filled Area & Text window.
Use this window to change the on-screen display characteristics of text and lines. Changes apply to all
projects.
The PLUS+1 GUIDE default settings are True Size for all lines and Center Line for text.
Drawing Area Pointer—Displays the Graphics Pointer Setup window.
Use this window to change the pointer display, pointer resolution, and set the x-axis and y-axis zero
references.
Color Schemes—Select the Classic scheme to make the Drawing Area background black. Select the White
scheme to make the Drawing Area background off-white.
Backup Folder Displays the Select Folder Backup Job window.

Use this window to set the location for a backup copy of your project.
You must define a backup folder before backups will begin.
Backup Interval Displays the Define Backup Interval in Minutes window.

Use this window to set how often the PLUS+1 GUIDE program automatically backs up your project. Making a
change in the Drawing Area starts the countdown to the next automatic save.
You must define a backup folder before backups will begin.
Install Hardware Displays the Install Hardware window.

Use this window to browse to and add hardware definitions to the Hardware tab.
Install Function Library Displays the Install Function Library window.

Use this window to browse to and add library files to the Library tab.
Uninstall Hardware Displays the Uninstall window.

Use this window to remove hardware definitions from the Hardware tab.
40 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
Menu
Item Description
Uninstall Function Library Displays the Uninstall Function Library window.

Use this window to browse to remove function libraries from the Library tab.
Install Font Displays the Install Font window.

Use this window to make additional fonts available in projects for PLUS+1 graphical terminals.
See Define Screen Page/Install Additional Fonts on page 414 for more information.
Uninstall Font Displays the Uninstall Font window.

Use this window to view all installed fonts and select fonts to uninstall.
Tools Palette Displays the Icon Menu window.

Use this window to modify the button assignments in this pop-up window.
Options Displays the Options window.

Use this window to set PLUS+1 GUIDE options such as enabling the Undo/Redo commands.
Add The commands in this menu add page outlines, buses, ports, text, and other elements to your application.
Page Adds a page where you click in the Drawing Area.

To go to the interface view page you have added, enter the page and then click Page Interface Editor.
Page Interface Editor Displays the page interface view of a page that you have entered.
Use the controls in this view to change the pins, text, and graphic elements that define the appearance of the
page.
Port Wire Displays the Select Signal–Schematics Design window.

Use this window to add a single signal port to where you click in the Drawing Area.
Port Bus Adds a multi-signal port to where you click in the Drawing Area.
Route Wire/Bus Starts drawing either a green single signal wire or a red multi-signal bus from where you click in the Drawing
Area.
You get a bus when you start routing from a bus source. You get a wire when you start routing from a wire
source.
k toggles the route between a wire and a bus.
9 terminates unconnected routes.
Repeat Connection Duplicates a selected route connection.

Repeated connections automatically have a number added to their name—Signal_Name, Signal_Name2,
Signal_Name3, Signal_Name4.
Text/Vector Graphics Displays a menu of text and graphics commands.

Use these command to add text and graphic elements to the Drawing Area.
Tools The commands in this menu open tools to service application that you have downloaded, repair errors in your
module, and manage your PLUS+1 GUIDE license.
PLUS+1 Service Tool Opens the PLUS+1 Service Tool program.

Use this tool to download applications to PLUS+1 hardware and also to monitor and change application
values.
You can open this service program independently of the PLUS+1 GUIDE program.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 41

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
Menu
Item Description
Optimize Nets Use to repair routes that are broken when you import a block or page.
Use to remove unneeded data from memory to improve tool performance and produce smaller application
files.
View Logical Net Displays the Logical Net window.

Use this window to trace the connections of a selected logical net throughout a single page or multiple pages.
View Net Names Displays various windows that show floating entries, interface port mismatches, and net errors.
Click items in these lists to see previews of the pages where these problems are located.
License Manager Displays the Select License window.

Use this window to manage your PLUS+1 GUIDE license.
The user ID is a number that is unique to your computer. You must send this number to Sauer-Danfoss to get
a license number to unlock the PLUS+1 programs.
Help The commands in this menu display help for and information about the PLUS+1 GUIDE program.
Help Contents Opens a hyperlinked, online Help version of the user manual.
User Manual Opens a Portable Document Format (PDF) version of the user manual, formatted for printing.
Release Notes Displays Readme Help files for the PLUS+1 GUIDE program.
Create Troubleshooting File Displays a Create Troubleshooting File window.

Use this window to create a zipped folder to e-mail to the Sauer-Danfoss HelpDesk. This folder contains your
project files and other useful troubleshooting information.
About PLUS+1 GUIDE Displays the About PLUS+1 GUIDE window.

Use this window to see PLUS+1 GUIDE version and license information.
42 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
Toolbar
r s
ito io
n ic
Ed t
ap
h
Sa ve P ect
ce us ec r
/B nn G
ge
Vi
rfaire Co re or
t
ve
O
Sa Pro t
et pea
ew
an
N
e t
pe roj
nt i s
ew
W at ec
Pr jec
M /Ch
I Bu
SC rint
D Re
n ec
e W
oj
ge out epe ort /V
C h
P
e
rt xt
ry
ec
y/
S
tc
o
e
o
ro
a
P
o
ed
ue
ov
op
nd
re
e
Fi
tA
R P
el
j
P R P T
St
le
R
Q
U
s
t
le
Fi
er
et
m
ra
ed
Pa
ng
ea ol
ly
C
ha
o
on
om
ro hec ed
T
C
d-
e
Pa
g
pi
he All
ic
ed
r C han
le
rv
ge
Le
rC k
ck
r M ect
R
En Pag
en Se
Al
C
Zo m I
N
av
In
e
M
te
es or
Se es
Zo e
le
le
av
at
1
ns
om n
sp or
e
an
rP
pi
pi
er
sa
S
ig
o
le
io
om
om
ag
p
U
ro
at
O
ct
ag
g
pt
el
PL
Er
Er
ut
er
or
O
C
H
e
Toolbar buttons access commonly used PLUS+1 GUIDE commands.
The Screen Editor uses the unavailable (grayed out) buttons shown in the preceding
figure.
T See Menus on page 36 for a complete list of all commands accessed through the menu
bar.
Toolbar
Button Description
New Project Displays the Create New Project window.

Use this window to name a new project and to create a folder for files in your project.
Open Project Displays the Open Project window.

Use this window to locate and open P1P and P1X format project files.
Save Project Saves the current project files without zipping them into a single PIP format file.
Save Project As Displays the Save Project As window.

Use this window to save the current project under a new name and in a new folder.
Print Displays the Plotter Output Setup window.

Use this window to print out pages from the application.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 43

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
Toolbar
Button Description
View SCS File Displays the Open SCS File window.

Use this window to browse to an open an SCS file. (This SCS file can be the SCS file for the project that you are
currently working on.)
The selected SCS file displays in the read-only Module Viewer window.
The Module Viewer window only supports navigation and export functions. No programming changes can
be made in this window.
Navigate in the Module Viewer window using View menu keyboard shortcuts, such as E (Enter Block) and
L (Leave Block).
Export items from the Module Viewer window using the File menu keyboard shortcut of Y (Export Block).
Query/Change Use to change the properties of items that you select. White text or red text typically indicates a property that
you can change.
Make your changes using either the Inspector tab or the pop-up Edit Value window to make the change.
Move Moves the items that you select.
Stretch Moves the items that you select and stretches segments in routes that you select.
Stretch adds a vertex to a selected route segment. You can move this vertex without changing the positions
of the other vertexes on the route.
Copy/Repeat Copies what you have selected in the Drawing Area. Items selected for copying turn white. Clicking places
copied items.
This command only works within the current Drawing Area. Use the Block and Page commands in the File
menu to copy items to other pages.
Delete Deletes the items that you have selected in the Drawing Area. Selected items turn white.
The Attributes window displays when you select an individual item or identical items. Click OK to delete
your selection.
The Select Item Class window displays when you select several different items. Use this window to select the
items that you want to delete.
Asterisks (*) identify items that will be deleted.
Dashes (-) identify items that will not be deleted.
Undo/Redo Undo—Reverses programming actions.

Redo—Reverses Undo actions.
Available computer memory determines the number of actions that you can undo.
The Options window enables and disables the undo/redo function. Click the Options button in the toolbar
to display this window.
Page Interface Displays the page interface view of a page that you have entered.
Editor Use the tools in this view to change the pins, text, and graphic elements that define the appearance of the
page.
44 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
Toolbar
Button Description
Route Wire/Bus Starts routing (drawing) either a green single signal wire or a red multi-signal bus.
You get a red bus when you start routing from a bus. You get a green wire when you start routing from a
single signal source.
k toggles your route between a wire and a bus.
9 terminates unconnected routes.
Repeat Connection Duplicates a selected route connection.

Repeated connections automatically have a number added to their name—Signal_Name, Signal_Name2,
Signal_Name3, Signal_Name4.
Port Wire Displays the Select Signal–Schematics Design window.

Use this window to add a single signal port to the Drawing Area.
Port Bus Adds a multi-signal port bus to the Drawing Area.
Text/Vector Displays a drop-down list of text and graphics tools.

Graphics Use these tools to add text and vector graphics elements to the Drawing Area.
Manager The Manager, Page Navigator, Inspector, Compiler Messages, and Selector buttons control the display of
locked tabs when you have selected the default layout. To select the default layout, click Default Layout in
the View menu.
This button toggles the display of a locked Manager pane that has a Project Manager tab and a Page
Navigator tab.
Project Manager tab—Displays a tree view of the Hardware Descriptions that you installed to create and
compile a PLUS+1 application.
You select Hardware Descriptions in the Hardware tab and drag them into this tab.
Page Navigator Displays the Page Navigator tab that contains a tree view of the pages in your application. Click a page
name in the tree view to display the selected page in the Drawing Area.
Inspector Toggles the display of a locked Inspector tab.

Use this tab to view and change the properties of items that you select with the Query/Change button.
Compiler Messages Toggles the display of a locked pane that has a Compiler Messages tab, an Error Messages tab, and a Build
Messages tab. These tabs display compiler messages.
Compiler Messages tab—Displays the compiler messages that log to the Screen.tmp file, located in the
project folder.
Error Messages tab—Displays compiler error messages. Errors stop the compile process.
Build Messages tab—Displays messages from the compiler as it compiles your application into a
downloadable file.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 45

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
Toolbar
Button Description
Selector Toggles the display of a locked Selector pane that has a Hardware tab, a Component tab containing a
Preview, and a Function tab.
Hardware tab—Displays a tree view of Hardware Descriptions for specific PLUS+1 models.
Each Hardware Description links to the resources needed to create and compile an application for a specific
PLUS+1 hardware model. Drag Hardware Descriptions from here into the Project Manager tab.
Component tab—Displays a tree view of components that you can use to build your application. Drag
needed components into the Drawing Area.
The Preview pane shows a preview of the selected component.
Function tab—Displays a tree view of the higher-level functions that you can use in your application. Drag
needed functions into the Drawing Area.
Leave Page Leaves the current page.
Enter Page Enters a selected page.

On pages with ports, drag on a port to enter the page.
On new pages that do not yet have ports, drag on a border to enter the page.
Zoom In Zooms in and centers the view where you click.
Zoom Out Zooms out and center the view where you click.
Compile All Compiles all modules to produce a downloadable file.
Compile Changed Compiles only modules that you have changed since the last Compile All.
Use this command to save time when you have more than one module.
Error Check All Checks for errors in all modules.

Clicking the Error Check All or the Error Check Changed button does not compile downloadable files.
Error Check Compiles to check for errors only in the modules that you have changed since the last Compile All.
Changed
PLUS+1 Service Tool Opens the PLUS+1 Service Tool program.

Use this tool to download applications to PLUS+1 hardware and to monitor and change application values.
You can open this service tool independently of the PLUS+1 GUIDE program.
Generate Read-only Displays the Generate Read-only Parameter File window.

Parameter File You use this window when creating a downloadable, read-only parameters lhx file. See Create a Read-only
Parameters File on page 373 for more about this process.
Options Displays the Options window.

Use this window set PLUS+1 GUIDE options.
Help Displays the complete PLUS+1 GUIDE User Manual in Acrobat Portable Document Format (PDF).
46 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
Plotter Output Setup Window

Toolbar > or File menu > Print
Use this window to set up your printer output and to print out pages from your
application.
Plotter Output setup window

Item Description
Output to Files Identifies the folder containing the plotter output files.
To change this folder, click to display a Select/Define Base File for Plot Files window. Use this window to
create a new folder or to select another folder.
Selecting a Windows Printer as the Current Plotter makes this selection unavailable.
Current Plotter Displays a Select Current Plotter window.

Use this window to select common plotter outputs.
Select Windows Printer to output to a Windows printer.
Plotter Selection (unlabeled) Shows the plotter or Windows printer that you choose in the Select Current Printer window.
In the preceding figure, an HP LaserJet 8000 prints the selected Output Pages.
Plotter Setup Displays a Plotter Setup window when the Current Plotter output is sent to a plotter output file.
Use this window to set print margins and x-axis and y-axis origin points.
Displays a Print window when the Current Plotter output is sent to a Windows Printer.
Use this window to select a Windows printer and to set printer preferences.
Current Tools Displays a Define New Pen Set window.

Use this window to select an existing pen set or create a new pen set.
Create pen sets when outputting to color printers and plotters.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 47

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window

Item Description
Tools Selection (unlabeled) Identifies the pen set that you selected in the Define New Pen Set window.
Edit Displays an Assign Pens window.

Use this window to change the pen assignments of the current pen set.
Manage Tools Displays a Select Pen Set to Delete window.

Use this window to delete pen sets.
Edit Layers/True Size Displays an Edit Plotter Layer Set window.

Use this window to turn on and off the output of objects and layers on pages.
The selections that you make in this window apply to all pages.
Output Pages Lists the pages that can be selected for output.
Toggle Page When checked, selects and deselects Output Pages.

Asterisks (*) identify pages that output when you select Plot Batch & Quit.
Dashes (-) identify pages that do not output when you select Plot Batch & Quit.
Place When checked, displays a Define Transformation window for a page that you have selected in Output Pages.
Use this window to define the Offset, Scale, Rotation, and other properties of the selected page.
All Displays the Define Transformation All Pages window.

Use this window to define the Offset, Scale, Rotation, and other properties for all Output Pages.
View Sheet When checked, displays a View Sheet window for a page that you select in the Output Pages.
Use this window to preview how the selected page fits on the output sheet.
View Tools When checked, displays a Defined Tools window for a page that you select in the Output Pages.
Use this window to review the output settings for the selected page.
All Displays a Defined Tools window.

Use this window to review the output settings for all selected Output Pages.
Plot Page Immediately outputs a page that you select in the Output Pages.
Edit Sort Number When checked, displays a Define Sort Number window for a page that you select in the Output Pages.
Use this window to change the order of Output Pages.
Save Log File Creates a log file that contains the output settings for each page that you select in the Output Pages.
48 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window

Item Description
Sheet Size X Sets the output sheet size in millimeters when the Current Plotter selection outputs pages to files.
Sheet Size Y
Identifies the paper size in millimeters used by a printer when the Current Plotter selection outputs pages to a
Windows printer.
Load Displays a Select Sheet Size window.

Use this window to select different output sizes.
Save Displays a Define Sheet Size window.

Use this window to name and save the current output size.
Delete Displays a Select Sheet Size Object to Delete window.

Use this window to delete output sizes.
Plot Batch & Quit Outputs all selected Output Pages and closes the Plotter Output Setup window.
Asterisks (*) identify pages that output.
Dashes (-) identify pages do not output.
Save & Quit Saves any changes made in the Plotter Output Setup window and then closes this window.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 49

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
Options Window
Toolbar > or Setup menu > Options > Options window
> PLUS+1 GUIDE > General or Preview
Click
• General Settings set general PLUS+1 GUIDE options.
• Preview Settings (see page 51) enable the Preview panes in the Component tab
and in other tabs.
• Grid Settings (see page 52) define the grid settings displayed in the Screen Editor.
General settings
Item Description
Undo/Redo Check to enable the Undo and Redo commands.
Pop-up Editor window for Check to enable the pop-up Edit Value window that displays when you click components with the
components Query/Change tool.
Component tab hides When checked, the Component tab hides the components that cannot be used with the selected hardware.
unavailable components
Component tab displays auto When checked, clicking an unexpanded branch in the Component tab displays a pop-up menu that shows all
pop-ups the items within the branch.
Hardware tab displays auto When checked, clicking an unexpanded branch in the Hardware tab displays a pop-up menu that shows all the
pop-ups items within the branch.
Hardware tab hides empty When checked, the Hardware tab hides empty folders in its hardware tree.
folders
My Blocks tab displays auto When checked, clicking an unexpanded branch in the Hardware tab displays a pop-up menu that shows all the
pop-ups items within the branch.
Log keystrokes and mouse Check to create a _Plus1GUIDE.log. This file, located in the project folder, logs mouse actions and keystrokes
actions and can be useful when diagnosing PLUS+1 GUIDE application problems.
50 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
General settings
Item Description
Log file Defines the size of the_Plus1GUIDE.log.
Auto pop-up delay (ms) Sets the delay before a tab displays a pop-up menu for the branch you click.
Range: 10–5000 ms
Text size Normal—Pop-up menus in the tabs display component icons.

Small (No Icons)—Pop-up menus in the tabs do not display icons and also use a smaller text size.
Click
These settings enable the Preview panes in the Component tab and in other tabs.
Preview settings
Item Description
Component tab Check to enable the Preview in the Component tab.

The Preview panel previews the component that you click in this tab.
Function tab Check to enable the Preview in the Function tab.

The Preview panel previews the function that you click in this tab.
Hardware tab Check to enable the Preview in the Hardware tab.

The Preview panel previews the hardware that you click in this tab.
My Blocks tab Check to enable the Preview in the My Blocks tab.

The Preview panel previews the blocks that you click in this tab.
Screen Library tab in Screen Check to enable the Preview in the Screen Library tab.
Editor The Preview panel previews the item that you click in this tab.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 51

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
Click
Grid Settings define the two grids used in the Screen Editor:
• Layout pane grid—This grid fills the entire Layout pane. You use this grid in the
Define Areas page when laying out Screen Areas.
• Screen area grid—This grid appears within each Screen Area. You use this grid in the
Define Screen page when laying out Screen Library items.
Grid settings
Item Description
Screen Areas Sets the characteristics of the Screen Area grid that appears within each Screen Area.
You use this grid in the Define Screen page when laying out items from the Screen Library, such as images
and text.
Visible Click to make this grid visible.
Snap to grid Click to snap the Reference point of items to the grid.
File transparency Click to make all items visible through stacked Screen Areas.
You can use this option when aligning items placed on different Screen Areas.
Color Click to select a color for the lines in the grid from a drop-down list.
Cell width Click to set the horizontal distance, in pixels, between gridlines.
Cell height Click to set the vertical distance, in pixels, between gridlines.
52 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
Grid settings
Item Description
Layout pane Sets the characteristics of the Layout pane grid that appears within each Screen Area.
You use this grid in the Define Areas page when laying out Screen Areas.
Visible Click to make lines in the grid visible.
Snap to grid Click to snap the upper-left corners of Screen Areas to the grid.
Color Click to select a color for the lines in the grid from a drop-down list.
Cell width Click to set the horizontal distance, in pixels, between gridlines.
Cell height Click to set the vertical distance, in pixels, between gridlines.
Layout Pane and Screen Area Grids
Sets Screen Area grid
Sets Layout panel grid
Layout panel
Screen Area grid
Layout panel grid
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 53

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
View Logical Net Window
Page Preview pane

highlights selected net
Use this window to trace the connections of a selected logical net on a single page or
throughout multiple pages.
View Logical Net window

Item Description
Page(s) Lists all the pages in which the selected net appears.
Click a page name in Page(s) list to display the page in Page Preview pane.
Page Preview pane Previews the page selected in the Page(s) list, highlighting the selected logical net.
Click in this pane to close the View Logical Net window and display the previewed page in the Drawing Area.
List of Nodes this Page Not implemented in this release.
List of Nodes across Pages Not implemented in this release.
List of Tags across Pages Not implemented in this release.
Change Port Names across Click to display the Define New Name for <n> Ports window (<n> is the total number of ports to be renamed).
Pages The name that you enter in this window replaces all the port names that belong to the selected logical net.
The Define New Name for <n> Ports window renames the ports on every page in which the selected net
appears.
This window does not rename the ports that bring signals into and out of pages.
Change Port Names on this Click to display the Define new Port Name window.
Page The name that you enter in this window replaces just the port names in the logical net that is highlighted in the
Page Preview pane.
The Define new Port Name window only renames ports on the page displayed in the Page Preview pane.
This window does not rename the ports that bring signals into and out of the page.
54 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
Hardware Tab
Previous/Next Collapse All
Hardware Category Search

Hardware Type
Hardware Description
Data Sheet
API Specification
Template
Template Overview
Right-click
Preview
This tab contains hardware-related items, organized by Hardware Category, Hardware

Type, hardware model, and Hardware Description. Each PLUS+1 hardware model has a
Hardware Description.
• A Hardware Description has the resources needed by the PLUS+1 GUIDE program to
compile an application for the selected hardware model. You make these resources
available to the PLUS+1 GUIDE program by dragging a Hardware Description from the
• Associated with each Hardware Description is a hardware Template and

documentation about the hardware.
To make programming simpler, the hardware Template contains predefined inputs,

outputs, and memory locations that match the selected hardware. You make a hardware
Template available by dragging it from the Hardware tab into the Drawing Area.
Hardware documentation typically has specifications, application interface (API)

information, and a template overview for the hardware model.
Hardware tab
Item Description
Previous/Next Click to expand branches in the Hardware tree.
Collapse All Click to collapse all branches in the Hardware tree.
Search Click to display the Search window.

Use this window to search for items in the Hardware tree. For more information, see Search Window on page
57.
Hardware Category These folders organize hardware by category, such as Programmable Hardware and IO Modules.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 55

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
Hardware tab
Item Description
Hardware Type These folders organize hardware by type within hardware categories.
Hardware Description Links to the resources that the PLUS+1 GUIDE program needs to create and compile an application for a
specific PLUS+1 hardware model.
You make these resources available to the program by dragging a Hardware Description from the Hardware
tab into the Project Manager tab.
Right-click a Hardware Description to display a pop-up menu with commands to Install Hardware or Uninstall
Hardware.
Data Sheet Click to view the product specification for the hardware model. This document provides a general description
of the hardware model that typically includes its features, dimensions, power requirements, and pin
assignments.
API Specification Click to view the application interface (API) description for the hardware model.
Refer to this document when configuring hardware inputs and outputs.
Template Click to view programming templates for the hardware model.

To make programming simpler, a Template contains predefined inputs, outputs, and memory locations that
match the selected hardware model.
You make a hardware Template available by dragging it from the Hardware tab into the Drawing Area.
Template Overview Click to view a document that provides basic information about using the template.
Preview Provides a preview of the selected hardware model.

Use the Options window settings (see page 50) to enable this preview.
56 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
Search Window
Use this window to search the Hardware tab for specific Hardware Descriptions.
Search window
Item Description
Search Enter your search term here.
Search in Part numbers—Check to search for part numbers that match your Search entry.
Descriptions—Check to search for descriptions that match your Search entry.
Keywords—Check to search for keywords that match your Search entry.
Options Use these Options to restrict your search.

Case sensitive—Check to search only for items that match the case of your Search entry.
Whole words—Check search only for whole words that match your Search entry.
Exact match—Check to search only for items that exactly match your Search entry.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 57

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
Project Manager Tab

Project
Hardware Description Comment*
Kernel
Download Click to download to PLUS+1 hardware
Application Name
Right-click
Application ID*
Main Module*
*Change these values in the Inspector panel.
This tab lists the Hardware Descriptions that you have installed. These Hardware
Descriptions are specific to PLUS+1 hardware models. A Hardware Description has the
resources needed by the PLUS+1 GUIDE program to create and compile an application for
a specific PLUS+1 hardware model.
To make these Hardware Descriptions available to the PLUS+1 GUIDE program, you must
drag them from the Hardware tab to this tab.
Project Manager tab

Item Description
Project The project name.
Hardware Description Displays the Hardware Description that installed when you dragged it from the Hardware tab.
Comment
Kernel The operating system used with the hardware. This kernel is part of the Hardware Description and cannot be
changed.
Download The name of the download file.

After you compile your application, click this file. The PLUS+1 Service Tool program will open, with this file
ready to download.
Application Name The name of the application.

An application can consist of one main module and several subsidiary modules.
Right-click the Application Name to display a pop-up menu with the following commands:
Add New Module—Click to add a new module to the application.
Add Existing Module—Click to display the Select File window. Use this window to select an existing module
to add to the application.
Add Existing Array—Click to display the Select File window. Use this window to select an existing array to
add to the application. For more information, refer to Array Constant from File on page 195.
Add Document—Click to display the Select File window. Use this window to select a file—such as a Microsoft
Word or PDF document—that you want to add to the project folder.
Application ID Replace with a description of the application. The description is optional. Use the Inspector tab to enter the
description.
When you update an application, the old and new descriptions must match before a download can start.
58 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
Project Manager tab

Item Description
Main Module Click to display the module in the Drawing Area.

Typically, you replace this module by dragging a Template over from the Hardware tab.
The Template has predefined inputs, outputs, and memory locations that match the selected PLUS+1
hardware.
Right-clicking the application name displays a pop-up menu with commands to add additional subsidiary
modules.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 59

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
About the Project Manager and Hardware Tabs

Hardware
Hardware Category
Description Comment
Kernel Hardware Type
Hardware Descripion
Download
Data Sheet
Application ID API Description
Application Template
Template
Template Overview
The Hardware tab (shown on the right) contains the hardware-related resources needed
by the PLUS+1 GUIDE program to create and compile an application for PLUS+1 hardware.
• Major items in the Hardware tab typically include:

A Hardware Description that has the resources that the PLUS+1 GUIDE program
needs to create and compile and application for a specific PLUS+1 hardware model.
Typically associated with each Hardware Description are:
− A Hardware Data Sheet that describes the hardware.

− An API (Application Interface) Specification that describes how you can configure
the inputs and outputs on the hardware.
− A Template with predefined inputs, outputs, and memory locations that match
the hardware for which you are creating an application.
− A Template Overview that describes how to use the Template.

• Major items in the Project Manager tab include:
− A Hardware Description that contains the resources needed by the PLUS+1 GUIDE
program to create and compile an application for a specific PLUS+1 hardware
model. You drag the Hardware Description from the Hardware tab to the Project
Manager tab.
− A Kernel (operating system) needed by the hardware for which you are
programming. The kernel installs along with the Hardware Description.
60 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
− A Download file in limited hex (*.lhx) format. After the PLUS+1 GUIDE program
compiles your application, you download this file to your hardware.
You can limit downloads to specific hardware models and hide the application
code.
− An optional Application ID that describes the application. When you update an

application, new and old IDs must match before the download starts.
− An Application Template. This is the starting point for you application. You
installed this Application Template by dragging the Template from the
Hardware tab and dropping it into the Drawing Area.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 61

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
Page Navigator Tab
Navigation arrows
Navigation pane Drawing Area
Use this tab to go directly to pages in your application.
Navigation tab
Item Description
Navigation arrows Click to display previous navigation selections in the Drawing Area.
Navigation pane Displays a tree view of all the pages within your application.
Click a page name in the tree to display the page in the Drawing Area.
62 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
Component Tab
This tab displays a tree view of components that you can drag to the Drawing Area for use
in your application.
Components are the basic building blocks in an application.
Component tab
Item Description
Components Lists the components, by type, that you can use in your application.
Drag the component that you need from here into the Drawing Area.
When new components libraries become available, use the Install Library command in the Setup menu to
add them to this tab
Preview Shows a preview of the component that you have clicked.

Use the Options window settings (see page 50) to show or hide this preview.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 63

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
Function Tab
Function Block manual
This tab displays a tree view of functions that can you drag into the Drawing Area for use
in your application.
A function is a block of components, created by Sauer-Danfoss, and designed to perform

specific tasks such as:
• Ackermann steering.
• Frequency-to-speed conversion.
Function tab
Item Description
Function Block manual Click to view the Basic Function Block Library manual.
Functions Lists the functions, by type, that you can use in your application.
Drag the function that you need from here into the Drawing Area.
When new function libraries become available, use the Install Library command in the Setup menu to add
them to this tab.
Preview Shows a preview of the selected function.

Use the Options window settings (see page 50) to show or hide this preview.
64 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
My Blocks Tab
Right-click
Use this tab to quickly select the blocks and pages that you have created and use
frequently in your projects. These blocks and pages are available for all projects.
A Blocks folder and a Pages folder store the blocks and pages in this tab. The typical path
to these folders is: My Computer\Local Disk (C:)\Program Files\Sauer-Danfoss\PLUS1\
P1ToolData\MyBlocks
My Blocks tab
Item Description
Blocks Lists the blocks that you have exported to the Blocks folder using the File menu’s Block > Export Block command.
Click and drag the block that you want to use into the Drawing Area.
Pages Lists the pages that you have exported to the Pages folder using the File menu’s Page > Export Page command.
Click and drag the page that you want to use into the Drawing Area.
Preview Can provide a preview of the block or page that you click.
To create a Preview pane image and an icon, perform the following procedure:
1. Create a Windows Metafile (*.WMF) image of the block or page. This image displays in
the Preview pane. Keep the image smaller than 150 x 150 pixels.
2. Save the WMF file in the Blocks or the Pages folder using the same name that you
used for the block or page.
3. Create an icon (*.ICO) of the block or page. This icon displays next to the block or page
name in the My Blocks tab’s trees. Keep the icon smaller than 16 x 16 pixels.
4. Save the ICO file in the Blocks or the Pages folder using the same name that you used
for the block or page.
For example, the Memory.WMF and the Memory.ICO files provide the preview and the
icon for the Memory.SCS page.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 65

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
Inspector Tab
6 Character Constant Logical AND Set/Reset Latch
Coordinates
Component Name
User Property
Version
Errors
Warnings
Use this tab to view and change the properties of the items that you select with the
Query/Change tool.
You can also use the small, pop-up Edit Value window to change values (see Change
Properties with the Pop-up Edit Window on page 358).
The kind of item that you select determines what properties you can change.
Inspector tab
Item Description
Coordinates The x-axis and y-axis coordinates on the page where you placed the item.
Name The name of the item.
User Property A value that you enter to change item properties.

The properties that you can change depend on the item selected.
The preceding figure shows three examples of properties.
The Inspector tab for the 6-Character constant component displays V1 and X1 values that set the component's value and its
data type.
The Inspector tab for the AND component displays a Modifier value that sets the number of inputs on this component.
The Inspector tab for the Set/Reset Latch component displays no values that you can change.
Version The release version of the item.
Errors The error status of the item.

0 = No error. The PLUS+1 GUIDE program will compile the item without errors.
1 = Error. The PLUS+1 GUIDE program cannot compile the item. The compile process will abort with errors. You need a newer
item.
Warnings The warning status of the item.

0 = No warning. The PLUS+1 GUIDE program will compile the item without warnings.
1 = Warning. The PLUS+1 GUIDE program will compile the item, but with warnings. You should get a newer item as soon as
possible.
66 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
Compiler Messages Tabs
Click to display error

page in Drawing Area
Scroll to view PC memory usage
The Compiler Messages pane has a Build Messages tab, an Error Messages tab, and a
Compiler Messages tab.
Use these tabs to:
• Observe the compile process that produces a download file.
• Find and fix the errors that abort the compile process.
Compiler messages tabs

Item Description
Build Messages tab The compiler displays build messages in this tab as it compiles your application into a downloadable file.
Error Messages tab The compiler displays compile error messages in this tab. Errors stop the compile process.
All errors within an application and most compile process errors produce messages in this tab. If your compile
process aborts, look in this tab first.
A message about an error in an application has lines that describe the type of error and the page and
coordinates where the compiler found the error. Click these lines to display the error source page in the
Drawing Area.
(The page where the compiler found the error and the page that caused the error are not always be the same.
You may have to return to a higher-level page to fix the source of the error.)
The *.err file (* = project name), located in the project folder, logs these error messages.
Compiler Messages tab The compiler displays the messages that it logs to the Screen.tmp file, located in your project folder.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 67

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1 GUIDE Window
68 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Data Types
This chapter describes:
• Data types.
Each data type has a range of values or a specific function.
• Overflow conditions that result from using data types whose range of values is too
small.
• How the time base data type is used.
• The basic characteristics of arrays.
Chapter contents Data Types .......................................................................................................................................................70

About Overflow Conditions .......................................................................................................................71
About the Time Base Data Type ...............................................................................................................72
About the Array Data Type.........................................................................................................................74
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 69

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Data Types
Data Types
The following table lists the data types used in the PLUS+1 GUIDE program.
Data types
Data Type Description Range
BOOL True or False T–F
U8 Unsigned 8 bits 0 to +255
S8 Signed 8 bits -128 to +127
S16 Signed 16 bits -32768 to +32767
S32 Signed 32 bits -2147483648 to +2147483647
TL Text label; pointer to string in text table
PXO PiXel object; pointer to an external graphic
PORT Hardware port; must match hardware port name
T Time base
FILE Identifies a window in which graphics display
FONT Font used; defined by the operating system
COLOR Color used; defined by the operating system
OBN Object name
NULL No connection
LANG Sets display language
ARRAY Up to 32767 elements allowed
70 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Data Types
About Overflow Conditions

An overflow occurs when an output value becomes larger than the data type assigned to
the output allows.
U8 = 255 maximum value
01100100 01100100
100 + 100 = 200 ADD 11001000 100 + 200 = Undefined ADD 1 00101100
U8 U8
01100100 11001000
OK Not OK: Overflow Condition
In the preceding figure:
• The Add component adds two U8 values and outputs a U8 result.
• The U8 data type has 8 bits, with a maximum value of 255.
− OK—100 + 100 = 200; output is less than 255.

− Not OK—100 + 200 = 300; an overflow because the output is greater than 255.
The overflow produces an incorrect output, typically 44.
When assigning data types to integer outputs, keep in mind maximum possible values of
each data type to avoid overflow.
U8 = 255 maximum value U8 = 65535 maximum value

01100100 01100100
100 + 200 = Undefined ADD 1 00101100 100 + 200 = 300 ADD 0000000100101100
U8 U16
11001000 11001000
Not OK: Overflow Condition OK
In the preceding figure:
• Not OK—100 + 200 = 300; an overflow condition because the output is greater than
255.
• OK—100 + 200 = 300; no overflow because the U16 data type can have a maximum
value of 65535.
“Clamped” components, such as Add Clamped and Subtract Clamped handle overflow
conditions by:
• Clamping the output at either maximum or minimum value allowed by the output’s
data type.
• Setting a Boolean output to T during each program loop in which the overflow
condition occurs.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 71

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Data Types
About the Time Base Data Type

The Time Base data type is used with Time and Transition components.
Three examples of Time and Transition components are:
• On Delay—Delays the return of a Boolean signal from F to T for a specified time.
• Oscillator—Outputs a Boolean signal that oscillates at a specified frequency.
• Pulse—Holds a Boolean output at T for a specified time before returning to F.

Time unit multiplier
t
Time
Trigger Function Output duration = time unit x time unit multiplier
UNIT
Time unit multiplier: 8
Time unit
t
Time
Trigger Function 8 ms output duration
UNIT
Time unit: T1M (1 ms)

The preceding figure shows how time units are:
• Applied as a constant value to a time function component.
• Multiplied by the time unit multiplier to set the output duration.

The following table lists the PLUS+1 GUIDE time units and the values that they represent.
Your hardware selection determines the time units that you can select.
Time base values

Time Base Value Time Base Abbreviation
1 ms T1M
10 ms T10M
100 ms T100M
1s T1S
60 s T60S
1h TIH
Loop time TLOOP*
* Loop time or program loop—the time it takes a change in the input to produce a change in the output.
72 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Data Types
Resolution
Processing time, output duration, and time units set the resolution (variation) between the
minimum and maximum output duration times.
Minimum output duration time = output duration − time unit

Maximum output duration time = output duration + processing time
Where :
Output duration = time unit × time unit multiplier
Processing time = time for a change in an input to produce a change in the output
• Example 1:
With a time unit of 100 ms, a time unit multiplier of 5, and a processing time of 15 ms:
Minimum output duration time = 400 ms
Minimum output duration time = (100 ms × 5) − 100 ms
Maximum output duration time = 515 ms

Maximum output duration time = (100 ms × 5) + 15 ms
• Example 2:
With a time unit of 10 ms, a time unit multiplier of 25, and a processing time of 15 ms:
Minimum output duration time = 240 ms
Minimum output duration time = (10 ms × 25) − 10 ms
Maximum output duration time = 265 ms

Maximum output duration time = (10 ms × 25) + 15 ms
TLoops always have the same output duration because their time unit value is the
processing time.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 73

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Data Types
About the Array Data Type

• Arrays can have up to 32,767 elements.
• The first element in an array is in position 0.
• When defining an array input from the Multi-character Constant component:
− Enclose the array within parentheses ( ).

− Use commas to separate each element in the array.
• When defining an array input from a text file, use commas in the text file to separate
each element in the array.
• When defining the data type of an array:
− Put the number of elements in the array within brackets [ ].

− Select the data type of the array, such as S8, U16, or BOOL.
The following figure shows examples of arrays and array-related components.
Array Constant from File component Name of text file containing a

Values comma-delimted array
FILE
ARRAY[11]U16
Number of elements in array Data type of elements
Position 0
Multi-character Constant component
(-6, -4, -2, 0, 2, 4, 6) Array input
ARRAY[7]S8
Number of elements in array Data type of elements
Set Array Element component

(dynamic run-time value) 5
VAL
(0, 0) (5, 0)
ARRAY[2]U8 ARRAY[2]U8
POS
Position of element to be set 0
(dynamic run-time value) 3 VAL
(5, 3)
ARRAY[2]U8
1 POS
74 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
This chapter describes the components in Component tab of the Selector window.
Context-Sensitive Help for Components ......................................................................................76

About Component Descriptions......................................................................................................77
Mathematical..........................................................................................................................................79
Limit ........................................................................................................................................................ 106
Compare................................................................................................................................................ 116
Constant ................................................................................................................................................ 131
Logical.................................................................................................................................................... 142
Switch, Counter, Memory ................................................................................................................ 159
Array........................................................................................................................................................ 183
Data Conversion ................................................................................................................................. 197
Transition, Time................................................................................................................................... 208
Connection ........................................................................................................................................... 224
Module................................................................................................................................................... 260
Manage .................................................................................................................................................. 267
Access..................................................................................................................................................... 273
Read-only Parameter......................................................................................................................... 285
Display.................................................................................................................................................... 292
Application Log................................................................................................................................... 315
Page ........................................................................................................................................................ 316
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 75

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Context-Sensitive Help for Components

The PLUS+1GUIDE program has context-sensitive help for all components.
To display context-sensitive help for a component:
1. Click the component for which you need help.
2. Press 1.
76 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
About Component Descriptions

This chapter describes components using pictures, descriptive text, and tables.
Typical component picture

AInput A3 XOutput
Pins typically numbered up, A2 X2

U8
from bottom to top
A1 X1
? ?Set value in pop-up
Edit Value window
In a typical component picture:
• A labels, such as A1, A2, and A3, indicate input pins.
• X labels, such as X1 and X2, indicate output pins.
• ? indicates a value that you must select if:
− There is no data type selected.

− You need to change the default data type.
Use either the pop-up Edit Value window or the Inspector tab to change the data
type.
Typical Valid connections table
Valid connections for Valid connections for

A input pins X output pins
Each component has a “Valid connections” table. This table identifies the data types that
you can connect to component pins.
The table lists either single data types, such as BOOL or U16, or a data type group, such as
INT (integer).
If the table lists a data type group, it means that you can connect any one of the data types
in the group to a pin. For example, INT means that you can connect a U8, U16, U32, S8,
S16, or S32 data type to a pin.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 77

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
The following table lists the data types in each data type group.
Data type groups

Individual Data Types in Data Type Group
Data Type Group BOOL U8 U16 U32 S8 S16 S32
ARRAY X X X X X X X
INT (Integer) X X X X X X
UINT (Unsigned integer) X X X
ALL All PLUS+1 data types.
78 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Mathematical
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 79

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Arithmetic
Click
Add
A2
X1
ADD
?
A1
Use:
• Adds two integer signals.

Function:
• X1 = A1 + A2
Valid connections
Pin Data Type Pin Data Type
A1 INT X1 INT
A2 INT
Example—Add
250 250
ADD 1250 ADD -750
1000 -1000
80 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Subtract
+
A2
X1
SUB
?
A1
Use:
• Subtracts two integer signals.

Function:
• X1 = A2 – A1
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 INT
A2 INT
Example—Subtract
+ +
2500 2500
SUB 1500 SUB 3500
1000 -1000
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 81

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Multiply
A2
X1
MUL
?
A1
Use:
• Multiplies two integer signals.

Function:
• X1 = A1 ∗ A2
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 INT
A2 INT
Example—Multiply
1000 1000
MUL 2000 MUL -2000
2 -2
82 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Divide
A2
X1
DIV
?
A1
Use:
• Divides two integer signals.

Function:
• X1 = A2 ÷ A1
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 INT
A2 INT
Example—Divide
10 10
DIV 5 DIV -5
2 -2
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 83

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Rounded Divide
A2
X1
RDIV
?
A1
Use:
• Divides two integer signals and outputs the rounded result.
• Function:
− X1 = Rounds the output of A2 ÷ A1:

– Up if the remainder is ≥ 0.5
– Down if the remainder is < 0.5

Valid connections
A1 INT X1 S16
A2 INT
Example—Rounded Divide
10 10
RDIV 3 RDIV 3
S16 S16
3 4
(10 ÷ 3 = 3.33) (10 ÷ 4 = 2.50)
10 10
RDIV 2 RDIV 2
S16 S16
5 6
(10 ÷ 5 = 2.0) (10 ÷ 6 = 1.66)
84 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Modulo
A2
X1
MOD
?
A1
Use:
• Outputs the modulo (remainder) that results from the division of two integer signals.
Function:
⎛ ⎡ A2 ⎤ ⎞
• X1 = A2 - ⎜ ⎢ ⎥ × A1⎟
⎝⎣ ⎦A1 ⎠
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 U16
A2 INT
Example—Modulo
10 10
MOD 1 MOD 2
U16 U16
3 4
10 10
MOD 0 MOD 4
U16 U16
5 6
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 85

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Add Capped
A2
X1
ADD
?
A1
X2
Use:
• Adds two integer signals.
• Clamps the output if it overflows and sets the X2 output to T to indicate an overflow
condition.
• Boolean outputs on capped components can be wired together; an overflow

condition outputs a T on the net.
Function:
• X1 = A1 + A2
• If X1 does not overflow, then X2 = F
• If X1overflows, then:
− X2 = T
− X1 = clamps at the minimum or maximum value of its data type
− X2 resets to F at the start of each program loop
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 INT
A2 INT X2 BOOL
Example—Add Capped
50 50
ADD 150 ADD 255*
U8 U8
100 400
F T
*255Max value for the U8 data type
50 50
ADD 150 ADD 0*
U8 U8
100 -100
F T
*0Min value for the U8 data type
86 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Subtract Capped
+
A2
X1
SUB
?
A1 X2
Use:
• Subtracts two integer signals.
• Clamps its X1 output if it overflows and sets its X2 output to T to indicate an overflow
condition.

Function:
• X1 = A2 – A1
• If X1 overflows, then:
− X2 = T
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 INT
A2 INT X2 BOOL
Example—Subtract Capped
50 50
ADD 150 ADD 255*
U8 U8
100 400
F T
50 50
ADD 150 ADD 0*
U8 U8
100 -100
F T
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 87

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Multiply Capped
A2
X1
MUL
?
A1
X2
Use:
• Multiplies two integer signals.
condition.

Function:
• X1 = A2 ∗ A1
− X2 = T
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 INT
A2 INT X2 BOOL
Example—Multiply Capped
10 100
MUL 100 MUL 255*
U8 U8
10 100
F T
10 100
MUL 100 MUL 0*
U8 U8
10 -100
F T
88 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Divide Capped
A2
X1
DIV
?
A1
X2
Use:
• Divides two integer signals.
• Clamps the output if it overflows and sets X2 to T to indicate an overflow condition.

Function:
• X1 = A2 ÷ A1
− X2 = T
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 INT
A2 INT X2 BOOL
Example—Divide Capped
500 600
DIV 250 DIV 255*
U8 U8
2 2
F T
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 89

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Rounded Divide Capped
A2
X1
RDIV
?
A1
X2
• Divides two integer signals and outputs the rounded result.
condition.

• Function:
− X1 = Rounds the output of A2 ÷ A1:

– Up if the remainder is ≥ 0.5
– Down if the remainder is < 0.5
− X2 = T
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 S16
A2 INT X2 BOOL
Example—Rounded Divide Capped

(100000 ÷ 2 = 50000) (65534 ÷ 2 = 32767)
100000 65534
RDIV 32767* RDIV 32767
S16 S16
2 2
T F
*32767 = Max value for S16 data type
(65533 ÷ 2 = 32766.5)
65533
RDIV 32767
S16
2
F
90 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Modulo Capped
A2
X1
MOD
?
A1
X2
Use:
• Outputs the modulo (remainder) that results from the division of two integer signals.
condition.

Function:
⎛ ⎡ A2 ⎤ ⎞
• X1 = A2 - ⎜ ⎢ ⎥ × A1⎟
⎝ ⎣ A1 ⎦ ⎠
− X2 = T
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 U16
A2 INT
Example—Modulo Capped
(209999 modulo 70000 = 69999)
210000 2099999
MOD 0 MOD 65535*
U16 U16
70000 700000
F T
*65535 = Max value for the U16 data type
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 91

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Absolute Value
Click
Absolute Value
X1
A1 ABS
?
Use:
• Outputs the magnitude of an integer signal.

Function:
• X1 = Absolute value of A1
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 INT
Example—Absolute Value
2500 ABS 2500 -2500 ABS 2500
92 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Absolute Value Capped
X1
A1 ABS
?
X2
Use:
• Outputs the magnitude of an integer signal.
condition.

Function:
• X1 = Absolute value of A1
− X2 = T
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 INT
X2 BOOL
Example—Absolute Value Capped
-250 ABS 250 -500 ABS 255*

U8 U8
F T
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 93

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Scale
Click
Scale
A2 A3
X1
A1 SCALE
?
A5 A4
Use:
• Scales an integer signal into a new range.
• Apply scaling to a sensor signal.

Function:
⎛ ⎛ A1 − A5 ⎞ ⎞
• X1 = ⎜ ⎜ ⎟ × ( A3 − A4 ) ⎟ + A4
⎝ ⎝ A2 − A5 ⎠ ⎠
T The A2–A5 values set the input-to-output ratio and offset applied to the A1 input signal.
They do not limit the resulting X1 output value.
Valid connections
A1–A5 INT X1 INT
Example—Scale
The following two figures and plots show how different input values applied to this
component produce different input/output ratios. This example applies to both Scale
components.
94 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
25
10 20
100
10 15
10
X1 Pin Output
5
SCALE 0
40 4
-5
-10
-15
-100 -20
-10 -25
--200 -180 -160 -140 -120 -100 -80 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
A1 Pin Input
This example applies 10 to 1 scaling:
· -100 input = -10 output.
· 40 input = 4 output.
· 100 input = 10 output.
400
350
300
300
10
4500
250
X1 Pin Output
2500 SCALE 150 200
150
500
0 100
This example scales a 05000 mV input: 50

· 500 mV input = 0 output.
· 2500 mV input = 150 output.
· 4500 mV input = 300 output. 0
-50
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000
A1 Pin Input
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 95

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Scale Capped
A2 A3
X1
A1 SCALE
?
X2
A5 A4
Use:
• Scales an integer signal into a new range.
• Applies scaling to a sensor signal.
condition.

Function:
⎛ ⎛ A1 − A5 ⎞ ⎞
• X1 = ⎜ ⎜ ⎟ × ( A3 − A4 ) ⎟ + A4
⎝ ⎝ A2 − A5 ⎠ ⎠
• If X1 does not overflow or overflow, then X2 = F
• If X1 overflows or a overflows, then:
− X2 = T
• X2—Resets to F at the start of each program loop
T The A2–A5 values set the input-to-output ratio and offset applied to the A1 input signal.
They do not limit the resulting X1 output value.
Valid connections
A1–A5 INT X1 INT
X2 BOOL
96 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Scale Capped
10 100 10 100
10 SCALE 100 100 SCALE 255*

F T
0 0 U8 U8
0 0 *255Max value for the U8 data type
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 97

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Trigonometric
Click
Sin
f(v) = 104 * sin(v/100)
A1 v f(v) X1
?
Use:
• Outputs the sine function of an integer signal.

Function:
• X1 = 104 x sin (A1/100)

Valid connections
A1 UINT X1 INT
Example—Sin
f(v) = 104 * sin(v/100) f(v) = 104 * sin(v/100) f(v) = 104 * sin(v/100)
4500 v f(v) 7071 9000 v f(v) 10000 13500 v f(v) 7071
S16 S16 S16
f(v) = 104 * sin(v/100) f(v) = 104 * sin(v/100) f(v) = 104 * sin(v/100)

18000 v f(v) 0 22500 v f(v) -7071 27000 v f(v) -10000
S16 S16 S16
f(v) = 104 * sin(v/100)

31500 v f(v) -7071
S16
98 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
13500
9000
4500
X1 Output
-4500
-9000
-13500
0 4500 9000 13500 18000 22500 27000 31500 36000
A1 Input (36000 = 360°)
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 99

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Cos
f(v) = 104 * cos(v/100)
A1 v f(v) X1
?
Use:
• Outputs the cosine function of an integer signal.

Function:
• X1 = 104 x cos (A1/100)

Valid connections
A1 INT X1 INT
Example—Cos
f(v) = 104 * cos(v/100) f(v) = 104 * cos(v/100) f(v) = 104 * cos(v/100)
4500 v f(v) 7071 9000 v f(v) 0 13500 v f(v) -7071
S16 S16 S16
f(v) = 104 * cos(v/100) f(v) = 104 * cos(v/100) f(v) = 104 * cos(v/100)

18000 v f(v) -10000 22500 v f(v) -7071 27000 v f(v) 0
S16 S16 S16
4
f(v) = 10 * cos(v/100)
31500 v f(v) 7071
S16
13500
9000
4500
X1 Output
-4500
-9000
-13500
0 4500 9000 13500 18000 22500 27000 31500 36000
A1 Input (36000 = 360°)
100 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Tan
f(v) = 104 * tan(v/100)
A1 v f(v) X1
?
Use:
• Outputs the tangent function of an integer signal.

Function:
• X1 = 104 x tan (A1/100)

Valid connections
A1 INT X1 INT
Example—Tan
f(v) = 104 * tan(v/100) f(v) = 104 * tan(v/100)
4500 v f(v) 10000 9000 v f(v) 2147483647
S16 S16
f(v) = 104 * tan(v/100) f(v) = 104 * tan(v/100)

13500 v f(v) -10000 18000 v f(v) 0
S16 S16
35000
30000
25000
20000
15000
10000
5000
X1 Output
-5000
-10000
-15000
-20000
-25000
-30000
-35000
0 4500 9000 13500 18000 22500 27000 31500 36000
A1 Input (36000 = 360°)
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 101

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Arc Sin
f(x) = 100 * arcsin(x/104)
A1 x f(x) X1
?
Use:
• Outputs the arcsine function of an integer signal.

Function:
• X1 = 100 x arcsin (A1/104)

Valid connections
A1 INT X1 INT
Example—Arc Sin
f(x) = 100 * arcsin(x/104) f(x) = 100 * arcsin(x/104)
3827 v f(v) 2250 7071 v f(v) 4500
S16 S16
f(x) = 100 * arcsin(x/104) f(x) = 100 * arcsin(x/104)

9239 v f(v) 6750 10000 v f(v) 9000
S16 S16
6000
4500
3000
X1 Output (4500 = 45°)
1500
-1500
-3000
-4500
-6000
-15000 -10000 -5000 0 5000 10000 15000
A1 Input
102 10100824 Rev CA April 2007 z z

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Arc Cos
f(x) = 100 * arccos(x/104)
A1 x f(x) X1
?
Use:
• Outputs the arccosine function of an integer signal.

Function:
• X1 = X1 = 100 x arccos (A1/104)

Valid connections
A1 UINT X1 INT
Example—Arc Cos
f(x) = 100 * arccos(x/104) f(x) = 100 * arccos(x/104)
9239 x f(x) 2250 7071 x f(x) 4500
S16 S16
f(x) = 100 * arccos(x/104) f(x) = 100 * arccos(x/104)

3825 x f(x) 6750 0 x f(x) 9000
S16 S16
10500
9000
X1 Output (4500 = 45°)
7500
6000
4500
3000
1500
0
-15000 -10000 -5000 0 5000 10000 15000
A1 Input
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 103

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Arc Tan
f(x) = 100 * arctan(x/104)
A1 x f(x) X1
?
Use:
• Outputs the arctangent function of an integer signal.

Function:
• X1 = 100 x arctan (A1/104)

Valid connections
A1 UINT X1 INT
Example—Arc Tan
f(x) = 100 * arctan(x/104) f(x) = 100 * arctan(x/104)
4142 x f(x) 2250 10000 x f(x) 4500
S16 S16
f(x) = 100 * arctan(x/104) f(x) = 100 * arctan(x/104)

24145 x f(x) 6750 2147483647 x f(x) 9000
S16 S16
5000
4000
3000
2000
X1 Output (4500 = 45°)
1000
-1000
-2000
-3000
-4000
-5000
-15000 -10000 -5000 0 5000 10000 15000
A1 Input
104 10100824 Rev CA April 2007 z z

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Square Root
f(x) = 100 * x
A1 x f(x) X1
?
Use:
• Outputs the square root of an integer signal.

Function:
• X1 = 100 x A1
• Accuracy: ±4
Valid connections
A1 UINT X1 UINT
Example—Square Root
f(x) = 100 * x
4 x f(x) 200
U32
f(x) = 100 * x
5 x f(x) 224
U32
f(x) = 100 * x
15 x f(x) 387
U32
f(x) = 100 * x f(x) = 100 * x

16 x f(x) 400 16 x f(x) 144 ErrorOverflow condition
U32 U8 Data type too small
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 105

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Limit
106 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Max/Min
Click
Max Value
A2
X1
MAX
?
A1
• Use
• Outputs the larger value of two integer signals.

Function:
• X1 = A1 if A1 ≥ A2
• X1 = A2 if A2 > A1
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 INT
A2 INT
Example—Max Value
750 1250
MAX 1000 MAX 1250
1000 1000
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 107

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Min Value
A2
X1
MIN
?
A1
Use:
• Outputs the smaller value of two integer signals.

Function:
• X1 = A1 if A1 =< A2
• X1 = A2 if A2 < A1
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 INT
A2 INT
Example—Min Value
750 1250
MIN 750 MIN 1000
1000 1000
108 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Median Value
A3
X1
A2 MED
?
A1
Use:
• Outputs the median value of three input values.
• Set upper and lower output limits

Function:
• X1 = A1 if:
− A2 =< A1 =< A3
− A3 =< A1 =< A2
• X1 = A2 if:
− A1 =< A2 =< A3
− A3 =< A2 =< A1
• X1 = A3 if:
− A1 =< A3 =< A2
− A2 =< A3 =< A1
Valid connections
A1 UINT X1 UINT
A2 UINT
A3 UINT
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 109

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Median Value
0 0
ADD -50 MED 0 ADD 125 MED 100
S8 S8
100 100
0
ADD 50 MED 50
S8
100
110 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Max Value Capped
A2
X1
MAX
?
A1
X2
• Use
• Outputs the larger value of two integer signals.
condition.

Function:
• X1 = A1 if A1 ≥ A2
• X1 = A2 if A2 > A1
− X2 = T
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 INT
A2 INT X2 BOOL
Example—Max Value Capped
200 500
MAX 200 MAX 255*
U8 U8
100 100
F T
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 111

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Min Value Capped
A2
X1
MIN ?
A1
X2
Use:
• Outputs the smaller value of two integer signals.
condition.

Function:
• X1 = A1 if A1 =< A2
• X1 = A2 if A2 < A1
− X2 = T
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 INT
A2 INT X2 BOOL
Example—Min Value Capped
200 -200
MIN 100 MIN 0*
U8 U8
100 100
F T
112 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Median Value Capped
A3
X1
A2 MED
?
A1
X2
Use:
• Output the median value of three input values.
condition.

• Set upper and lower output limits

Function:
• X1 = A1 if:
− A2 =< A1 =< A3
− A3 =< A1 =< A2
• X1 = A2 if:
− A1 =< A2 =< A3
− A3 =< A2 =< A1
• X1 = A3 if:
− A1 =< A3 =< A2
− A2 =< A3 =< A1
− X2 = T
Valid connections
A1 UINT X1 UINT
A2 UINT X2 BOOL
A3 UINT
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 113

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Median Value Capped
0 0
ADD -50 MED 0 ADD 125 MED 100
S8 S8
100 100
F F
0
ADD 50 MED 50
S8
100
F
114 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Limit
X1
A1
?
Use:
• Limits the X1 output to the maximum and minimum values of the data type selected
for X1.
Function:
• X1 = A1 converts into X1 data type
• X1 = Maximum value of the X1 data type if A1 > maximum value of the X1 data type
• X1 = Minimum value of the X1 data type if A1< minimum value of the X1 data type
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 INT
Example—Limit
125 125 1000 127
(S16 in/S8 out) (S16 in/S8 out)
-1000 -128
(S16 in/S8 out)
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 115

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Compare
116 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Compare
Click
Greater
A2 A
> X1
A1
A2 B
Use:
• Outputs a Boolean value based on the comparison of two integer signals.

Function:
• X1 = T if A2 > A1
• X1 = F if A2 = A1
• X1 = F if A2 < A1
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 BOOL
A2 INT
Example—Greater
999 A 1001 A
> F > T
1000 B 1000 B
1000 A
> F
1000 B
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 117

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Less
A2 A
< X1
A1 B
Use:

Function:
• X1 = T if A2 < A1
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 BOOL
A2 INT
Example—Less
999 A 1001 A
< T < F
1000 B 1000 B
1000 A
< F
1000 B
118 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Greater or Equal
A2 A
³ X1
A1 B
Use:

Function:
• X1 = F if A2 < A1
• X1 = T if A2 = A1
• X1 = T if A2 > A1
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 BOOL
A2 INT
Example—Greater or Equal
999 A 1001 A
³ F ³ T
1000 B 1000 B
1000 A
³ T
1000 B
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 119

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Less or Equal
A2 A
£ X1
A1 B
Use:

Function:
• X1 = T if A2 < A1
• X1 = T if A2 = A1
• X1 = F if A2 > A1
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 BOOL
A2 INT
Example—Less or Equal
999 A 1001 A
£ T £ F
1000 B 1000 B
1000 A
£ T
1000 B
120 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Equal
A2 A
= X1
A1 B
Use:

Function:
• X1 = F if A2 < A1
• X1 = T if A2 = A1
• X1 = F if A2 > A1
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 BOOL
A2 INT
Example—Equal
999 A 1001 A
= F
= F
1000 B 1000 B
1000 A
= T
1000 B
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 121

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Not Equal
A2 A
¹ X1
A1 B
Use:

Function:
• X1 = F if A2 ≠ A1
• X1 = T if A2 = A1
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 BOOL
A2 INT
Example—Not Equal
999 A 1001 A
¹ T ¹ T
1000 B 1000 B
1000 A
¹ F
1000 B
122 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Compare with Hysteresis
Click
Compare with Hysteresis High

A3
+
A2 H
COMPH X1
A1
Use:
• Outputs a Boolean value based on a hysteresis comparison between two integer input
signals.
Function:
• X1 = T if A2 ≥ (A1 + A3)
• X1 = F if A2 < A1
• X1 = No change if A1 =< A2 < (A1 + A3)

Valid connections
A1 INT X1 BOOL
A2 INT
A3 UINT
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 123

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Compare with Hysteresis High

1150
3
2
A1 + A3 1100
1 4
1050
5
A1 1000
6
950
A2 Input
X1 = T
X1 Output X1 = F
1 100 2 100
+ +
1050 H 1100 H
COMPH F COMPH F
1000 1000
A2 < A1 + A3 A2 = A1 + A3
3 100 4 100
+ +
1120 H 1050 H
COMPH T COMPH T
1000 1000
A2 > A1 + A3 A2 drops, but still > A1
5 100 6 100
+ +
1000 H 970 H
COMPH T COMPH F
1000 1000
A2 = A1 A2 < A1
124 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Compare with Hysteresis Middle

A3
+
A2 H
COMPM X1
A1
Use:
signals.
Function:
• X1 = T if A2 ≥ A1 + (A3 ÷ 2)
• X1 = F if A2 < A1 – (A3 ÷ 2)
• X1 = No change if A1 – (A3 ÷ 2) ≤ A2 < A1 + (A3 ÷ 2)

The quotient of A3 ÷ 2 rounds down to the next lowest integer (for example, 7.5
becomes 7).
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 BOOL
A2 INT
A3 UINT
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 125

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Compare with Hysteresis Middle

1100
3
2
A1 + (A3 ÷ 2) 1050
4
A1 1000
1 5
A1 - (A3 ÷ 2) 950
6
900
A2 Input
X1 = T
X1 Output X1 = F
1 100 2 100
+ +
950 H 1050 H
COMPM F COMPM T
1000 1000
A2 < A1 + (A3 ÷ 2) A2 = A1 + (A3 ÷ 2)
3 100 4 100
+ +
1065 H 1000 H
COMPH T COMPM T
1000 1000
A2 > A1 - (A3 ÷ 2) A2 drops, but still > A1 - (A3 ÷ 2)
5 100 6 100
+ +
950 H 925 H
COMPH T COMPM F
1000 1000
A2 = A1 - (A3 ÷ 2) A2 < A1 - (A3 ÷ 2)
126 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Compare with Hysteresis Low

A3
+
A2 H
COMPL X1
A1
Use:
signals.
Function:
• X1 = T if A2 ≥ A1
• X1 = F if A2 < (A1 – A3)
• X1 = No change if (A1 – A3) ≤ A2 < A1

Valid connections
A1 INT X1 BOOL
A2 INT
A3 UINT
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 127

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Compare with Hysteresis Low

1050
3
2
A1 1000
4
950
1 5
A1 - A3 900
6
850
A2 Input
X1 = T
X1 Output X1 = F
1 100 2 100
+ +
900 H 1000 H
COMPL F COMPL T
1000 1000
A2 < A1 A2 = A1
3 100 4 100
+ +
1015 H 950 H
COMPL T COMPL T
1000 1000
A2 > A1 A2 drops,
1000but still > A1 - A3
5 100 6 100
+ +
900 H 870 H
COMPL T COMPL F
1000 1000
A2 = A1 - A3 A2 < A1 - A3
128 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Compare in Window
+
A2
COMP X1
W
A1
A3
Use:
• Checks if the absolute difference between two signals is within a specified range and
then outputs a Boolean value based on this comparison.
Function:
• X1 = T if A2 ≥ A1 – (A3 ÷ 2) and A2 ≤ A1 + (A3 ÷ 2)
• X1 = F if A2 > A1 + (A3 ÷ 2)
• X1 = F if A2 < A1 – (A3 ÷ 2)
The product of A3 ÷ 2 rounds down to the next lowest integer (for example, 7.5
becomes 7).
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 BOOL
A2 INT
A3 UINT
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 129

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Compare in Window
5 1100
4 6
A1 + (A3 ÷ 2) 1050
3 7
A1 1000
2 8
A1 - (A3 ÷ 2) 950
1 9
900
A2 Input
X1 = T
X1 Output X1 = F
3 +
1 + 2 + 1000
925 950
COMP T
COMP F COMP T W
W W 1000
1000 1000
100
100 100
A2 < A1 - (A3 ÷ 2) A2 > A1 - (A3 ÷ 2) but < A1 + (A3 ÷ 2)
A2 = A1 - (A3 ÷ 2)
5 + 6 +
4 + 1075 1050
1050
COMP F COMP T
COMP T
W W
W 1000 1000
1000
100 100
100
A2 > A1 + (A3 ÷ 2) A2 = A1 + (A3 ÷ 2)
A2 = A1 + (A3 ÷ 2)
7 + 8 + 9 +
1000 950 925
COMP T COMP T COMP T
F
W W W
1000 1000 1000
100 100 100
A2 < A1 + (A3 ÷ 2) but > A1 - (A3 ÷ 2) A2 = A1 - (A3 ÷ 2) A2 < A1 - (A3 ÷ 2)
130 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Constant
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 131

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
True/False
True
T X1
Use:
• Outputs a Boolean constant true

Function:
• X1 = T
Valid connections
— — X1 BOOL
Example—True
F T
F F
T F
T BOOL T BOOL
132 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
False
F X1
Use:
• Outputs a Boolean constant false.

Function:
• X1 = F
Valid connections
— — X1 BOOL
Example—False
F T
F F
T F
T BOOL T BOOL
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 133

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Digit Autotype
Click
3 Digit Autotype
? X1
Use:
• Outputs a constant value.
• Sized for values with up to three digits.
• The value of your entry sets the data type (see the table below).
• Only accepts numbers.
To output Boolean values, use the False component and the True component.
T This component accepts values larger than three digits. Larger values that extend beyond
this component’s boundaries can be hard to read. For larger values, use either the 6 Digit
Autotype component (see page 136) or the Multi-Character component (see page 140).
Function:
• X1 = Auto-typed value of ?
Data types
Value Entered Data Type
0 to +255 U8
–128 to -1 S8
+256 to +65535 U16
–32768 to -129 S16
+65536 to +4294967296 U32
–2147483648 to –32769 S32
134 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—3 Digit Autotype

Output auto-typed as U8 255
Output auto-typed as S8 -128
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 135

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
6 Digit Autotype
? X1
Use:
• Sized for values with up to six digits.
• The value of your entry automatically sets the data type (see the table below).
• Only accepts numbers.
To output Boolean values, use the False component and the True component.
T This component accepts values larger or smaller than six digits. Larger values that extend
beyond this component’s boundaries can be hard to read. For larger values, use the Multi-
Character component (see page 140).
Function:
• X1 = Auto-typed value of?

Data types
Value Entered Data Type
0 to +255 U8
–128 to -1 S8
+256 to +65535 U16
–32768 to -129 S16
+65536 to +4294967296 U32
–2147483648 to –32769 S32
Example—6 Digit Autotype

136 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Typed
Click
3 Character
X1
?
?
Use:
• You must define the data type of the value.
• Component is sized for values with up to three digits.
T This component accepts values larger than three digits. Larger values that extend beyond
this component’s boundaries can be hard to read. For larger values, use either the 6
Character component (see page 139) or the Multi-Character component (see page 140).
Function:
• X1 = Value of ?
Valid connections
— — X1 ALL
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 137

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—3 Character
Output is T 1 U8 range: 0 to +255 255
BOOL U8
Output is F 0 U16 range: 0 to +65535 255

256
BOOL U16
S8 range: -128 to +127 -128

255
S8
S16 range: -32768 to +32767 -127

-128
255
S8
S16
0xPrefix for positive hexadecimal values 0xFF

-128
255
U8
-0xPrefix for negative hexadecimal values -0xFF

-128
255
U8
S16
138 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
6 Character
X1
?
?
Use:
• Component is sized for values with up to six digits.
T This component accepts values larger than six digits. Larger values that extend
beyond this component’s boundaries can be hard to read. For larger values, use the
Multi-Character component (see page 140).
Function:
• X1 = Value of ?
Valid connections
— — X1 ALL
Example—6 Character
U16 range: 0 to +65535 65535
255
U16
U32 range: 0 to +4294967295 65536

255
U32
S16 range: -32768 to +32767 -32768

255
S16
S32 range: -2147483648 to +2147483647 -32769

-128
255
S8
S32
0xPrefix for positive hexadecimal values 0x7FFF

-128
255
U8
U32
-0xPrefix for negative hexadecimal values -0x7FFF

-128
255
U8
S32
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 139

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Multi-Character
C?
X1
?
Use:
• Use for large, multi-character constants.
• See About the Array Data Type on page 74 for an example of how to use this
component to input an array.
Function:
• X1 = C?
Valid connections
— — X1 ALL
Example—Multi-Character
4294967295
U32 range: 0 to +4294967295
U32
-2147483648
S32 range: -2147483648 to +2147483647
S32
0xFFFFFFFF
0xPrefix for positive hexadecimal values
U32
-0x80000000
-0xPrefix for negative hexadecimal values
S32
Position 0
(0, -4, 6, 8, -4, 0, 0, 12) Hexadecimal prefix
Array output Red value
ARRAY[8]S8
Green value
Data type of elements within array
Blue value
Number
Number of
of elements
elements in
in array
array Placeholder
Data type 0x 80 80 FF 00
Color signal output
COLOR
Data type
140 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Zero
0 X1
Use:
• Defines a constant value of 0.

Function:
• X1 = 0
Valid connections
— — X1 U8
Example—Zero
F T
25 25
0 25
0 U8 0 U8
Null
NULL X1
Use:
• Indicates that a connection requires no input.
• Can provide a NULL value for an input that is not being used.
Function:
• X1 = NULL
Valid connections
— — X1 NULL
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 141

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Logical
142 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
AND2–AND5
Click
T Except for the number of inputs, the AND2 through AND5 components function alike.
Only the AND2 component is described here.
A2
X1
A1
Use:
• AND function for two to eight Boolean signals.

Function:
• X1 = AND function applied to A1–A8

Truth table
A1 Input A2 Input X1 Output
F F F
T F F
F T F
T T T
Valid connections
A1 BOOL X1 BOOL
A2 BOOL
Example—AND
F F T T
F F F T
F T F T
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 143

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
OR2–OR8
Click
T Except for the number of inputs, the OR2 through OR8 components function alike. Only
the OR2 component is described here.
A2
X1
A1
Use:
• OR function for two to eight Boolean signals.

Function:
• X1 = OR function applied to A1–A8

Truth table
F F F
T F T
F T T
T T T
Valid connections
A1 BOOL X1 BOOL
A2 BOOL
Example—OR
F T F T
F T T T
F F T T
144 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
NOT
A1 X1
Use:
• NOT function for a Boolean signal.

Function:
• X1 = NOT function applied to A1

Truth table
A1 Input X1 Output
F T
T F
Valid connections
A1 BOOL X1 BOOL
Example—NOT
F T T F
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 145

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
XOR
A2
X1
A1
Use:
• Exclusive OR function for two Boolean signals.

Function:
• X1 = XOR function applied to A1 and A2

Truth table
F F F
T F T
F T T
T T F
Valid connections
A1 BOOL X1 BOOL
A2 BOOL
Example—XOR
F T
F T
F F
F T
T F
T T
146 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Bitwise
Click
Bitwise AND
A2
X1
?
A1
Use:
• Outputs a mask of the bit states in two integer signals.

Function:
• X1 = Bitwise AND output of A1 and A2

Valid connections
A1 UINT X1 UINT
A2 UINT
Example—Bitwise AND
00000010
00000000
00000001
00110011
00000011
00001111
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 147

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Bitwise OR
A2
X1
?
A1
Use:
• Outputs a merge of the bit states in two integer signals.

Function:
• X1 = Bitwise OR output of A1 and A2

Valid connections
A1 UINT X1 UINT
A2 UINT
Example—Bitwise OR
00000010
00000011
00000001
00110011
00111111
00001111
00000000
00000000
00000000
148 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Bitwise XOR
A2
X1
?
A1
Use:
• Outputs a comparison of the bit states in two integer signals.

Function:
• X1 = Bitwise XOR output of A1 and A2

Valid connections
A1 UINT X1 UINT
A2 UINT
Example—Bitwise XOR
00000010
00000011
00000001
00001111
00111100
00110011
00000000
111111111
00000000
11111111
00000000
11111111
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 149

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Shift
Click
Shift Left
A2
X1
A1 SHL
?
Use:
• Shifts bit data in an integer signal.

Function:
• X1 = A1 shifted left by the number of positions indicated by the value of A2
T Because the most significant bit in a signed value indicates the value’s sign, only use this
component with unsigned data types.
Valid connections
A1 UINT X1 UINT
A2 UINT
Example—Shift Left
Shift left 2 places
11100100 SHL 10010000

00
U8 in/U8 out
Shift left 4 places
11001000 SHL 10000000

0000
U8 in/U8 out
150 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Shift Right
A2
X1
A1 SHR
?
Use:
• Shifts bit data in an integer signal.
• Useful for bit shifting in CAN data.

Function:
• X1 = A1 shifted right by the number of positions indicated by the value of A2
T Because the most significant bit in a signed value indicates the value’s sign, only use this
component with unsigned data types.
Valid connections
A1 UINT X1 UINT
A2 UINT
Example—Shift Right
Shift right 2 places
11001000 SHR 00
00110010
U8 in/U8 out
Shift right 4 places
11001000 SHR 0000

00001100
U8 in/U8 out
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 151

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Position
Click
LSB Position
X1
A1 LSB #
?
Use:
• Outputs the position of the least significant bit (LSB) set to 1 in an integer signal.
• Can indicate the highest priority alarm if alarm states are coded into the byte.
Function:
• X1 = Position (from the right) of the least significant bit with a value of 1
• X1 = 0 if no bits are set to 1.

Valid connections
A1 UINT X1 UINT
Example—LSB Position
00000000 LSB # 0
U8 in/U8 out
11111110 LSB # 2
U8 in/U8 out
11111000 LSB # 4
U8 in/U8 out
152 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
MSB Position
X1
A1 MSB #
?
Use:
• Outputs the position of the most significant bit (MSB) set to 1 in an integer signal.
• Can indicate the highest priority alarm if alarm states are coded into the byte.
Function:
• X1 = Position (from the right) of the most significant bit with a value of 1
• X1 = 0 if no bits are set to 1.

Valid connections
A1 UINT X1 UINT
Example—MSB Position
00000000 MSB # 0
U8 in/U8 out
00000100 MSB # 3
U8 in/U8 out
00001000 MSB # 4
U8 in/U8 out
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 153

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Bit Count
X1
A1 BITCNT
?
Use:
• Outputs the number of bits set to true (1) in an integer signal.
• Can count the number of active alarms if alarm states are coded into the byte.
Function:
• X1 = Number of bits with a value of 1

Valid connections
A1 UINT X1 UINT
Example—Bit Count
00000001 BITCNT 1
U8 in/U8 out
00000011 BITCNT 2
U8 in/U8 out
00000111 BITCNT 3
U8 in/U8 out
154 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Set/Reset Latch
A1
Set
Q X1
Reset
A2
Use:
• Holds a Boolean signal output.
• Reset has priority.

Function:
• X1 = No change if A1 = F and A2 = F
• X1 = Set to T if A1 = T and A2 = F
• X1 = Reset to F if:
− A1 = F and A2 = T
− A1 = T and A2 = T
Truth table
F F No change
T F T
F T F
T T F
Valid connections
A1 BOOL X1 BOOL
A2 BOOL
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 155

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Set/Reset Latch
F T F T
Set Set Set Set

Q No change Q T Q F Q F
Reset Reset Reset Reset
F F T T
156 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Data Flip-Flop
A3
Set
A2 Data X1
A1 Clock X2
Reset
A4
Use:
• Holds a Boolean signal output.
• Toggles a Boolean signal output on the transition of a Boolean signal input.
• Can be used to implement a toggling push button by connecting the X2 output to the
A2 input.
• Reset input always has priority.

Function:
• X1 and X2 = No change if A1, A2, A3, and A4 = F
• X1 = T and X2 = F if A3 = T and A4 = F
• X1 = F and X2 = T if:
− A3 = F and A4 = T
− A3 = T and A4 = T
• X1 = F and X2 = T if A1 = Transition from F to T, A2 = F, A3 = F,
and A4 = F
• X1 = T and X2 = F if A1 = Transition from F to T, A2 = T, A3 = F,

and A4 = F
Truth table
A1 Input A2 Input A3 Input A4 Input X1 Output X2 Output
F F F F No change No change
Do not care Do not care T F T F
Do not care Do not care F T F T
Do not care Do not care T T F T
F–T transition F F F F T
T–F transition T F F T F
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 157

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Valid connections
A1 BOOL X1 BOOL
A2 BOOL X2 BOOL
A3 BOOL
A4 BOOL
Example 1—Data Flip-Flop

1 T 2 F
Set Set
0 Data T 0 Data T
F Clock F F Clock F
Reset Reset
F F
3 F
Set
0 Data F
F to T Clock T
Reset
0
F
Example 2—Data Flip-Flop

1 2
F F
Set Set
Data T Data F
F to T Clock F to T Clock
Reset Reset
F F
A1Push-button input. Each button push toggles the X1 state.
158 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Switch, Counter, Memory
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 159

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Switch Boolean Controlled
Click
Switch 2
A3
A2 X1
A1 ?
Use:
• Switches the output between one of two inputs.

Function:
• X1 = A1 if A3 = F
• X1 = A2 if A3 = T
Valid connections
A1, A2 BOOL, INT, TIME, TEXT, FILE, X1 BOOL, INT, TIME, TEXT, FILE, FONT, PORT, COL, LANG
FONT, PORT, COL, LANG
A3 BOOL
Example—Switch 2
F T
1000 1000
100 1000
100 100
160 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Switch 2 Capped
A3
A2 X1
A1 ?
X2
Use:
• Switches the output between one of two inputs.
condition.

Function:
• X1 = A1 if A3 = F
• X1 = A2 if A3 = T
− X2 = T
− X1 = Clamps at the minimum or maximum value of its data type
Valid connections
A1, A2 BOOL, INT, TIME, TEXT, FILE, X1 BOOL, INT, TIME, TEXT, FILE, FONT, PORT, COL,
FONT, PORT, COL, LANG LANG
A3 BOOL X2 BOOL
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 161

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Switch 2 Capped
F T
250 250
100 250
100 U8 100 U8
F F
500 255*
100 U8
T
*255Max value of the U8 data type
162 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Switch
Click
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 163

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Switch 2–16
T Except for the number of outputs, the Switch 2 through Switch 16 components function
alike. Only the Switch 16 component is described here.
A17
A16 0
A15 1
A10 6
A9 7 X1
A8 8 ?
A2 14
A1 15
Use:
• Switches the output between 1 of 16 inputs.

Function:
• X1 = A(16 – A17 input value)
• No inputs on this component can float. All inputs must connect to a value.
A17 input—X1 output
A17 Input X1 Output A17 Input X1 Output A17 Input X1 Output
<0 A16 5 A11 11 A5
0 A16 6 A10 12 A4
1 A15 7 A9 13 A3
2 A14 8 A8 14 A2
3 A13 9 A7 15 A1
4 A12 10 A6 >15 A1
Valid connections
A1–A16 BOOL, INT, TIME, TEXT, FILE, FONT, X1 BOOL, INT, TIME, TEXT, FILE, FONT, PORT,
PORT, COL, LANG COL, LANG
A17 INT
164 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Switch 2–16
0 1 6
2 0 2 0 2 0
4 1 4 1 4 1
14 6 14 6 14 6
7 7 7
2 4 14
8 8 8
U8 U8 U8
14 14 14
31 15 31 15 31 15
-6 18
2 0 2 0
4 1 4 1
14 6 14 6
7 7
2 31
8 8
U8 U8
14 14
31 15 31 15
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 165

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Switch 2–16 Capped
T Except for the number of outputs, Switch 2 Capped through Switch 16 Capped
components function alike. Only the Switch 16 Capped component is described here.
A17
A16 0
A15 1
A10 6
A9 7 X1
A8 8 ?
A2 14
X2
A1 15
Use:
• Switches the output between 1 of 16 inputs.
condition.

Function:
• X1 = A(16 – A17 input value)
− X2 = T
• No inputs on this component can float. All inputs must connect to a value.
166 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
A17 input—X1 output

A17 Input X1 Output A17 Input X1 Output A17 Input X1 Output
<0 A16 5 A11 11 A5
0 A16 6 A10 12 A4
1 A15 7 A9 13 A3
2 A14 8 A8 14 A2
3 A13 9 A7 15 A1
4 A12 10 A6 >15 A1
Valid connections
A1–A16 BOOL, INT, TIME, TEXT, FILE, FONT, X1 BOOL, INT, TIME, TEXT, FILE, FONT, PORT,
PORT, COL, IMG COL, IMG
A17 INT X2 BOOL
Example—Switch 2–16 Capped

0 1 6
2 0 2 0 2 0
4 1 4 1 4 1
500 6 500 6 500 6

7 7 7
2 4 255*
8 U8 8 U8 8 U8
14 14 14
F F T
31 15 31 15 31 15
-6 18
2 0 2 0
4 1 4 1
500 6 500 6
7 7
2 31
8 U8 8 U8
14 14
F F
31 15 31 15
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 167

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Counter
Click
Loop Counter with Carry

LOOP COUNT
A4 PRESET VALUE
X2
A3 PRESET OUT ?
A2 MAX
A1 CLU CARRY X1
Use:
• Daisy-chain together for large counts
• Use to total seconds, minutes, hours, and days of operating time

Function:
• A1 = F–T transition increments X2 by 1
• A2 = Maximum loop value
• A3—If:
− A3 = T, then X2 = A4
(A1 transitions do not increment X2 until A3 becomes F)
− A3 = F, then A1 transitions increment X2
• A4 = Preset value
• X1:
− Becomes T for one count after X2 = A2 and A1 transitions from F–T

− Stays F as long as X2 ≠ A4 + 1
• X2:
− Count out
− Resets to 0 when X1 = A2 and A1 transitions from F to T
168 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Valid connections
A1 BOOL X1 BOOL
A2 UINT X2 UINT
A3 BOOL
A4 UINT
Example—Loop Counter with Carry

LOOP COUNT Counts seconds
0 PRESET VALUE
T on startup PRESET OUT
59 MAX To memory component
1 s clock pulses CLU CARRY LOOP COUNT Counts minutes
Minutes (reads from memory on startup) PRESET VALUE To memory

PRESET OUT Minutes
To display
0
59 MAX
CLU CARRY LOOP COUNT
Counts hours
Hours (reads from memory on startup) PRESET VALUE To memory

PRESET OUT Hours
To display
1000 MAX
CLU CARRY
This example shows a timer that totals seconds, minutes, and hours.
• Every 60 seconds, the LOOP COUNT seconds component outputs a true CARRY that:
− Increments the LOOP COUNT minutes component by one.

− Writes OUT values from the LOOP COUNT minute and hour components to
memory.
• Every 60 minutes, the LOOP COUNT minutes component outputs a true CARRY. This
output increments the LOOP COUNT hours component by one.
• On start up, a true PRESET:
− Applies a PRESET VALUE of 0 to the LOOP COUNT seconds component.

− Applies a PRESET VALUE read from memory to the LOOP COUNT minutes and
hours components. (When this example is first downloaded, all PRESET inputs
need to be manually initialized to F. This example does not show this logic.)
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 169

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Loop Counter
A2 MAX X1
LOOP ?
A1 CLU
R
A3
Use:
• Loop an integer signal.

Function:
• X1 is a value between 0 and the A2 maximum value
• X1 increments each time A1 transitions from F to T
• X1 resets to 0 when X1 = A2 and A1 transitions from F to T
• X1 = 0 if A3 = T
• X1 = No change if A1 = F and A3 = F
Valid connections
A1 BOOL X1 UINT
A2 UINT
A3 BOOL
170 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Loop Counter
Sets maximum X1 value MAX Outputs from 0 to A2 value;
LOOP at maximum value,
FT increments X1 CLU next CLU input resets to 0
R
When T, resets X1 to 0
Count function
1 10 MAX 9
2 10 MAX 10
3 10 MAX 0
LOOP LOOP LOOP
F to T CLU F to T CLU F to T CLU
R R R
F F F
Reset function
1 10 MAX 9
2 10 MAX 0
LOOP LOOP
0 CLU 0 CLU
R R
F T
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 171

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Up/Down Counter
A5 A6
A4
A3 X1
A2 ?
A1
A7
Use:
• Counts the transitions of a Boolean signal.

Function:
• X1 is a value that goes from the A1 minimum value to the A4 maximum value
• X1 = A1 if A7 = T
• X1 = A6 if A5 = T and A7 = F
• X1 increments each time A3 transitions from F to T until X1 = A4 maximum value
• X1 decrements each time A2 transitions from F to T until X1 = A1 minimum value
• If the A6 preset enable value is greater than the A4 maximum value, then X1 = A4
• If the A6 preset enable value is less than the A1 minimum value, then X1 = A1
• A7 (Set minimum) = T has priority over A5 (Preset enable) = T
Pin functions
Pin Function Pin Function
A1 Minimum count value A5 Preset count enable
A2 Decrement count A6 Preset count value
A3 Increment count A7 Set minimum count value
A4 Maximum count value X1 Count output
172 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 INT
A2 BOOL
A3 BOOL
A4 INT
A5 BOOL
A6 INT
A7 BOOL
Example—Up/Down Counter
When T, sets X1 to A6 preset value* Preset value
A5 A6
Sets max X1 value A4

FT increments X1 A3
X1 Increments/decrements
FT decrements X1 A2 to A1 min/A4 max value
Sets min X1 value A1
A7
When T, resets X1 to A1 minimum value
*If A5 is T:
· Sets X1 to A1 min value when A6 value is less than A1 value.
· Sets X1 to A4 max value when A6 value is greater than A4 value.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 173

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Set minimum 5 Count up 5 Count up 5

F F F
10 10 10
F F to T F to T
0 1 2
F F F
0 0 0
T F F
Count down 5 Count down 5 Preset enable 5

F F T
10 10 10
F F F
1 0 5
F to T F to T F
0 0 0
F F F
174 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Value Connect
Click
Value
A2
X1
A1 CON
?
Use:
• Switches between signals when used in a group (see example).
• Samples and holds a value.
• Wire the X1 outputs of these components together to create a wire OR function.

Function:
• When using multiple components, whichever one has its A2 input active (A2 = T) will
have its input connected to the output
• If more than one A2 input is active (A2 = T), the value of the last one in the execution
order is valid.
Truth table
A2 Input X1 Output
F No change
T A1
Valid connections
A1 BOOL, INT, TIME, TEXT, FILE, FONT, X1 BOOL, INT, TIME, TEXT, FILE, FONT, PORT, COL,
PORT, COL, IMG IMG
A2 BOOL
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 175

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Value
1 T 2 F
1000 CON 1000 1000 CON 1000
F F
2500 CON 2500 CON
3 F
1000 CON 2500
2500 CON
176 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Value Capped
A2
X1
A1 CON
?
X2
Use:
• Switches between signals when used in a group (see the Example—Value on page
176).
• Samples and holds a value.
• Wire the X1 outputs of these components together to create a wire OR function.
condition.

Function:
• When using multiple components, whichever one has its A2 input active (A2 = T) will
have its input connected to the output
• If more than one A2 input is active (A2 = T), the value of the last one in the execution
order is valid.
Truth table
A2 Input X1 Output
F No change
T A1
Valid connections
A1 BOOL, INT, TIME, TEXT, FILE, FONT, X1 BOOL, INT, TIME, TEXT, FILE, FONT, PORT, COL,
PORT, COL, IMG IMG
A2 BOOL X2 BOOL
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 177

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Value Initialization
INIT
X1
A1 CON
?
Use:
• Initialize values at the start of each program loop.

Function:
• A1 = X1 at the start of each program loop
• Always executes first, regardless of its position in the application

Valid connections
A1 All X1 All
178 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Memory
Click
Memory
A2
A1 X1
?
MEM
Use:
• Samples a signal value and keeps this value after the signal changes.
Function:
• X1 = A1 if A2 = T
• X1 = X1 if A2 = F
• You cannot wire together multiple outputs from this component
• Use the Value component (see the Value component on page 175) when you need
to wire multiple outputs together.
Truth table
A2 Input X1 Output
F No change
T A1
Valid connections
A1 BOOL, INT, TIME, TEXT, FILE, X1 BOOL, INT, TIME, TEXT, FILE, FONT, PORT, COL, IMG
FONT, PORT, COL, IMG
A2 BOOL
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 179

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Memory
1 2
T F
1000 2500
1000 1000
MEM MEM
3
T
2500
2500
MEM
180 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Memory Capped
A2
A1 X1
?
MEM X2
Use:
• Samples a signal value and keeps this value after the signal changes.
condition.

Function:
• X1 = A1 if A2 = T
• X1 = X1 if A2 = F
− X2 = T
• You cannot wire together multiple X1 outputs from this component
• Use the Value component (see the Value component on page 175) when you need
to wire multiple X1 outputs together.
Valid connections
A1 BOOL, INT, TIME, TEXT, FILE, X1 BOOL, INT, TIME, TEXT, FILE, FONT, PORT, COL, IMG
FONT, PORT, COL, IMG
A2 BOOL X2 BOOL
Truth table
A2 Input X1 Output
F No change
T A1
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 181

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Memory Capped
1 2
T F
100 250
100 100
U8 U8
MEM F MEM F
3 4
T T
250 500
250 255*
U8 U8
MEM F MEM T
182 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Array
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 183

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Get Array Element

A2
A1
X1
?
Use:
• Output the value of an element in an array.

Function:
• A1 = Array
• A2 = Position of element to be output

The first element in an array is in position 0
• X1 = Copied element
• An array can have a maximum of 32,767 elements
• Different ARRAY data types on input and output pins can produce overflow on the X1
output
• For more about defining arrays, see About the Array Data Type on page 74.
Valid connections
A1 ARRAY X1 BOOL, INT
A2 U8, S8, S16
Example 1—Get Array Element

Postion 0 0
(-3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3)
ARRAY[7]S8 -3
5
(-3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3)
ARRAY[7]S8 2
184 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example 2—Get Array Element

The following example shows how to use the Get Array Element component to extract
individual elements from an array.
(5, 3, 4, 6)
ARRAY[4]U8
0
2
1
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 185

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Set Array Element

A3 VAL
X1
A2
?
A1 POS
Use:
• Set an element in an array to a defined value.

Function:
• A1 = Position of the element to be defined

• A2 = Array with element to be set
• A3 = Value of element to be set
• X1 = Array with changed element
output
• For more about array data types, see About the Array Data Type on page 74.
Valid connections
A1 U8, S8, S16 X1 ARRAY
A2 ARRAY
A3 INT, BOOL
Example 1—Set Array Element

Position 0
-4 VAL
(1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1) (-4, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1)
ARRAY[8]S8 ARRAY[8]S8
0 POS
-4 VAL
(1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1) (1, 1, 1, -4, 1, 1, 1, 1)
3 POS
186 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example 2—Set Array Element

The following example shows how to use the Set Array Element component to construct
an array that contains variables.
(Variable) 5
VAL
(0, 0, 0, 0) (5, 0, 0, 0)
ARRAY[4]U8 ARRAY[4]U8
POS
0
(Variable) 3 VAL
(5, 3, 0, 0)
ARRAY[4]U8
1 POS
(Variable) 4 VAL
(5, 3, 4, 0)
ARRAY[4]U8
2 POS
(Variable) 6 VAL
(5, 3, 4, 6)
ARRAY[4]U8
3 POS
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 187

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Length of Array
A1
X1
?
Use:
• Outputs the number of elements in an array.

Function:
• A1 = Array
• X1 = Number of elements in array
• Different ARRAY data types on input and output pins can produce can produce
overflow on the X1 output
Valid connections
A1 ARRAY X1 UINT
Example—Length of Array
(-3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3)
ARRAY[7]S8
7
188 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Delete Array Elements

A3
A2
A1
X1
?
Use:
• Delete elements from an array.

Function:
• A1 = Array from which elements are deleted
• A2 = Starting position of first element deleted

• A3 = Number of elements deleted from array
• X1 = Array after elements are deleted
output
• Input and output arrays must be the same data type
Valid connections
A1 ARRAY X1 ARRAY
A2 U8, S8, S16
A3 UINT
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 189

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Delete Array Elements

3
Position 0
0
(-6, -4, -2, 0, 2, 4, 6)
ARRAY[7]S8 (0, 2, 4, 6)
ARRAY[4]S8
3
3
(-6, -4, -2, 0, 2, 4, 6)
ARRAY[7]S8 (-6,-4, -2, 6)
ARRAY[4]S8
3
2
(-6, -4, -2, 0, 2, 4, 6)
ARRAY[7]S8 (-6 -4, 4, 6, 0, 0, 0)
ARRAY[7]S8
190 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Insert Array Elements

A4
A3
A2
X1
A1
?
Use:
• Insert additional elements into an array.

Function:
• A1 = Array into which new elements are to be inserted
• A2 = Starting position from which new elements are inserted

• A3 = Array with elements to be inserted
• A4 = Number of elements to be inserted
• X1 = Array after elements are inserted
• Different ARRAY data types on input and output pins can produce can produce
overflow on the X1 output
• Input and output arrays must be the same data type
• For more about array data types, see About the Array Data Type on page 74
Valid connections
A1 ARRAY X1 ARRAY
A2 U8, S8 S16
A3 ARRAY
A4 UINT
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 191

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Insert Array Elements

3
(2, 4, 6)
ARRAY[3]S8 Position 0
4
(-6, -4, -2, 0) (-6, -4, -2, 0, 2, 4, 6 )
3
(2, 4, 6)
ARRAY[3]S8
3
(-6, -4, -2, 0) (-6,-4, -2, 2, 4, 6, 0)
192 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Copy of Array
A3
A2 X1
A1 ?
Use:
• Copy and output elements from an array.

Function:
• A1 = Array with elements to be copied
• A2 = Position of first element to be copied

• A3 = Number of elements to be copied
• X1 = Copied elements
• Different ARRAY data types on input and output can produce overflow on the X1
output
Valid connections
A1 ARRAY X1 ARRAY
A2 U8, S8, S16
A3 UINT
Example—Copy of Array
3
Position 0
0 -6 -4 -2
(-6, -4, -2, 0, 2, 4, 6)
ARRAY[3]S8
ARRAY[7]S8
3
4 2 4 6
(-6, -4, -2, 0, 2, 4, 6)
ARRAY[3]S8
ARRAY[7]S8
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 193

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Find Array
A2
? X1
A1
?
Use:
• Finds the position of a matching element or the starting position of elements that
match
Function:
• A1 = Array with elements to be matched
• A2 = Array elements to be matched
• X1 = Position of matching element or the starting position of elements that match
• If no match, then X1 = -1
Valid connections
A1 ARRAY X1 S16
A2 ARRAY
Example—Find Array
Position 0
(3)
(1)
(1, 2, 3, 4) ARRAY[1]U8 ? 2
0
ARRAY[4]U8
(3)
(1, 2, 3, 4) ARRAY[1]U8 ? 2
ARRAY[4]U8
(2 3)
(1, 2, 3, 4) ARRAY[1]U8 ? 1
ARRAY[4]U8
(6)
(1, 2, 3, 4) ARRAY[1]U8 ? -1 (No match)
ARRAY[4]U8
194 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Array Constant from File

? (File name)
FILE X1
? (Data type)
Use:
• Input data from text (***.txt) file.
• Data must be comma delimited; only one array per text file.
Function:
• X1 = Array with elements set to comma delimited values from file
• ? = Text file name
− The file name must start with a capital letter:

OK: Array1.txt
Not OK: array1.txt
− The file name must not contain a period (.):

OK: Array1.txt
Not OK: Array.1.txt
For more about array data types, see About the Array Data Type on page 74.
Valid connections
— — X1 ARRAY
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 195

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Array Constant from File

Array file nameNo periods in name; must start with a capital letter)
Array sourcecomma delimited text file.
Save to a location outside of your PLUS+1 project folder.
Right-click
Browse to file with array

The PLUS+1 application registers
and copies the array file into your project folder.
Make any future changes to your array using this file.
Click array file name
Name of array
Name of array
VALUES (start with a capital letter)
Input in application for array values FILE
ARRAY[11]S8
Number of elements in array;
data type of elements
196 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Data Conversion
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 197

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Decode/Encode
Click
Encode 4 BOOL
A4 Lsb
ENCODE
A3 X1
A2 ?
A1 Msb
Use:
• Encodes Boolean signals into an integer signal.
• Can merge Boolean data into a CAN message.

Function:
• In the X1 output:
− The A1 input state sets bit 3

− The A4 input state sets bit 0
Valid connections
A1–A4 BOOL X1 INT
Example—Encode 4 BOOL
T Lsb T Lsb
ENCODE
ENCODE
F T
9 15
F T
T Msb T Msb
198 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Decode 4 BOOL
Lsb X4
DECODE
X3
A1
X2
Msb X1
Use:
• Decodes an integer signal into four Boolean signals.

Function:
• X1 = Output of bit 3
• A negative value on A1 sets all outputs to zero

Valid connections
A1 INT X1–X4 BOOL
Example—Decode 4 BOOL
Lsb T Lsb T
DECODE
DECODE
T F
3 9
F F
Msb F Msb T
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 199

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Encode 8
A8 0
A7
A6
ENCODE
A5 A1
A4 ?
A3
A2
A1 7
Use:
• Encodes a Boolean signal into an integer, ARRAY[INT], or ARRAY[BOOL] signal.
• Can merge data into CAN data.

Function:
• For an INT output on X1, the:
− A1 input sets bit 7

− The A8 input sets bit 0
• For an ARRAY output on X1, the:
− A1 input sets the value of the element in position 7

− A1 input sets the value of the element in position 0
Valid connections
A1–A8 BOOL, INT X1 ARRAY[BOOL], ARRAY [INT], INT
200 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Encode 8
BOOL input BOOL input
T 0 T 0
F T
F T
ENCODE
ENCODE
F T
129 255
F T
U8 U8
F T
F T
T 7 T 7
U8 input
45 0
16
24 Position 0
ENCODE
14 (45, 16, 24, 1 4 , 55, 12, 84, 35)

55 ARRAY[8]U8
12
84
35 7
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 201

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Decode 8 BOOL
0 X8
X7
X6
DECODE X5
A1
X4
X3
X2
7 X1
Use:
• Decodes an integer signal into eight Boolean signals.
• Can extract data from a CAN data byte.

Function:
• A negative value on A1 sets all outputs to zero

Valid connections
A1 U8 X1–X8 BOOL
Example—Decode 8 BOOL
0 T 0 T
F T
F T
DECODE
DECODE
F T
129 255
F T
F T
F T
7 T 7 T
202 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Decode 8 U8
0 X8
X7
DECODE U8
X6
X5
A1
X4
X3
X2
7 X1
Use:
• Decodes an eight element array that contains integers into eight U8 signals.
• Can extract data bytes from a CAN data field.

Function:
• X1 = Outputs the value of the element in position 7
• X2–X7 = Outputs the values of the elements in positions 6 through 1
• X8 = Outputs the value of the element in position 0

Valid connections
A1 ARRAY[8]U8 X1–X8 U8
Example—Decode 8 U8
0 112
631
DECODE U8
Position 0 175
(112, 631, 175, 233, 118, 462, 715, 611) 233
ARRAY[8]U8 118
462
715
7 611
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 203

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Split
X1
T1
A1 MS LS
X2
T2
Use:
• Separates an integer signal into two signals each having an equal number of bits.
• Can separate a combined CAN message into two parts.

Function:
• X1 = Half of the A1 input, with the most significant A1 bits
• X2 = Half of the A1 input, with the least significant A1 bits
− A 16-bit A1 input produces an 8-bit X1 output and an 8-bit X2 output.

− An 8-bit A1 input produces a 4-bit X1 output and a 4-bit X2 output, both with four
leading zeroes.
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 INT
X2 INT
Example—Split
00000010
00000010 00000001 MS LS
00000001
204 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Combine
A2
X1
MS LS
?
A1
Use:
• Combines two integer signals of the same size into a new signal with double the
number of bits.
• Can combine two separate received U8 CAN messages into a single U16 signal.
Function:
• X1 = A2 shifted to the left of A1
• Always combine inputs of the same bit size
− An 8-bit A1 input and an 8-bit A2 input combine to produce a 16-bit X1 output

− A 16-bit A1 input and a 16-bit A2 input combine to produce a 32-bit X1 output.
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 INT
A2 INT
Example—Combine
00000010
MS LS 00000010 00000001
00000001
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 205

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Swap
X1
A1 MS LS
?
Use:
• Swaps the bits in an integer signal.

Function:
• X1 = Least significant half of the bits in the A1 input swap places with the most
significant half of the bits in the A1 input
• After a swap:
− The 8 most significant bits in a 16-bit A1 input become the 8 least significant bits
in the X1 output.
− The 8 least significant bits in a 16-bit A1 input become the 8 most significant bits
in an X1 output.
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 INT
Example—Swap
00000010 00000001 MS LS 00000001 00000010
206 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Retype
X1
A1 RETYPE
?
Use:
• Changes the data type of a signal.

Function:
• X1 = A1
• Changing data types, such as going from S8 to U8 or from U16 to U8, can cause the X1
output to overflow
Valid connections
A1 INT X1 INT
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 207

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Transition, Time
208 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Transition
Click
Positive Transition
A1 X1
Use:
• Detects the positive transition (F to T) of a Boolean signal.

Function:
• X1 = T for one program loop after A1 transitions from F to T

Valid connections
A1 BOOL X1 BOOL
X1 output
Program Loop A1 X1
n1 F F
n2 T T
n3 T F
Example—Positive Transition
n1 n2
F F F to T T
n3
T F
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 209

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Negative Transition
A1 X1
Use:
• Detects the negative transition (T to F) of a Boolean signal.

Function:
• X1 = T for one program loop after A1 transitions from T to F

Valid connections
A1 BOOL X1 BOOL
X1 output
Program Loop A1 X1
n1 T F
n2 F T
n3 F F
Example—Negative Transition
n1 n2
T F T to F T
n3
F F
210 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Transition
A1 X1
Use:
• Detects a F to T or a T to F transition of a Boolean signal.

Function:
• X1 = T for one program loop after A1 transitions from F to T

or from T to F
Valid connections
A1 BOOL X1 BOOL
X1 output
Example 1 Program Loop A1 X1 Example 2 Program Loop A1 X1
n1 T F n1 F F
n2 F T n2 T T
n3 F F n3 T F
Example1—Transition
n1 n2
T F T to F T
n3
F F
Example2—Transition
n1 n2
F F F to T T
n3
T F
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 211

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Delay
Click
On Delay
A2
A1 X1
UNIT
A3
Use:
• Delays the return of a Boolean signal from F to T for a specified amount of time.
Function:
• X1 = F if A1 = F
• When A1 goes from F to T, the hold time (A3 x A2) begins
• X1 = F during the hold time
• X1 = T when the hold time ends

Valid connections
A1 BOOL X1 BOOL
A2 UINT
A3 TIME
Time units
Unit Unit Value Unit Unit Value Unit Unit Value
T1M 1 ms T1S 1s TLOOP Program loop
T10M 10 ms T60S 60 s
T100M 100 ms TIH 1h
212 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—On Delay
1 2
10 10
F F T F for 1000 ms, then T

UNIT UNIT (A2 ´A3 = 1000)
T100M T100M
T
Delay time starts A1 input
State
X1 output
F
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 3000
Time (ms)
T
Delay time starts Delay time restarts
State
F
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 3000
Time (ms)
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 213

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Off Delay
A2
A1 X1
UNIT
A3
Use:
• Delays the return of a Boolean signal from T to F for a set time.

Function:
• X1 = T if A1 = T
• When A1 goes from T to F, the hold time (A3 x A2) begins
• X1 = T during the hold time
• X1 = F when the hold time ends

Valid connections
A1 BOOL X1 BOOL
A2 UINT
A3 TIME
Time units
T10M 10 ms T60S 60 s
T100M 100 ms TIH 1h
214 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Off Delay
1 2
10 10
T T F T for 1000 ms, then F

UNIT UNIT
(A2 ´A3 = 1000)
T100M T100M
Hold time starts

T
A1 input
State
X1 output
F
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 3000
Time (ms)
Hold time starts Hold time restarts
T
State
F
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 3000
Time (ms)
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 215

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Loop Delay
X1
A1 t
?
Use:
• Passes the A1 input to X1 after a delay of one program loop.

Function:
• X1 = A1 after a delay of one program loop

Valid connections
A1 BOOL, INT, TIME, TEXT, FILE, X1 BOOL, INT, TIME, TEXT, FILE, FONT, PORT, COL, OBJ
FONT, PORT, COL, OBJ
Loop Delay component input/output

Program Loop A1 Input X1 Output
n1 5 5
n2 7 5
n3 7 7
n4 7 7
216 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Oscillator
A2 A3
A1 X1
A4
Use:
• Generates Boolean signals that toggle.
• Combine with a counter to make a timer.

Function:
• A2 is the on time (T in the component)
• A3 is the period (P in the component)
• X1 = T if A2 ≥ A3 (Note: this is not normal usage.)
• When A1 goes from F to T, the A2 and A3 values get sampled and:
− X1 = T during the first (A2) hold time

− X1 = F during the second (A3 – A2) hold time
As long as A1 = T, this function repeats. During repeats, the A2 and A3 values are
sampled and the hold times recalculated each time X1 goes from F to T
• X =T for at least one program loop if A2 > 0

Valid connections
A1 BOOL X1 BOOL
A2 UINT
A3 UINT
A4 TIME
Time units
T10M 10 ms T60S 60 s
T100M 100 ms TIH 1h
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 217

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Oscillator
10
4
T T for 400 ms/F for 600 ms
T100M
P P = A4 x A3 X1 output
T
State
T T = A2 x A4
F
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 3000
Time (ms)
218 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Pulse
A2
A1 X1
A3
Use:
• Holds a Boolean signal at T for the time you specify before returning the signal to F.
Function:
• If A1 = F, then X1= F
• The hold time (A3 × A2) begins when A1 goes from F to T
• X1 = T during the hold time
• X1 = F when the hold time ends

Valid connections
A1 BOOL X1 BOOL
A2 UINT
A3 TIME
Time units
T10M 10 ms T60S 60 s
T100M 100 ms TIH 1h
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 219

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Pulse
10 10
F F T T for 1000 ms or
until A1 goes from T to F
T100M T100M
A1 input X1 output
1
0
State
1
1000 ms (A2 x A3)
0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 3000
Time (ms)
1
0
State
1
0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 3000
Time (ms)
220 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Time Base
X1
Use:
• Outputs a constant time base.

Function:
• X1 = Time base value that replaces ?

Valid connections
— — X1 TIME
Time units
T10M 10 ms T60S 60 s
T100M 100 ms TIH 1h
T A smaller value time base produces a more accurate output resolution. See
Resolution on page 73 for a detailed explanation of resolution.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 221

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Time Base
Pulse component with a 100 ms Time Base
10 10
A2
F F T T for 1000 ms
A3
T100M T100M
1
A1 input
0
State
1
X1 output 1000 ms (A2 x A3)
Time (ms) 0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 3000
Pulse component with a 1 s Time Base

10 10
A2
F F T T for 10 s
A3
T1S T1S
1
A1 input
0
State
1
X1 output 10 s (A2 x A3)
Time (s) 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 30
222 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Measure Period
X1
A1
T1
A2
Use:
• Measures the period of a toggling signal.

Function:
• X1 = Time between the two last transitions from F to T on A1
• X1 = A1 ÷ A2
Valid connections
A1 BOOL X1 INT
A2 TIME
Time units
T10M 10 ms T60S 60 s
T100M 100 ms TIH 1h
Example—Measure Period
F to T (two transitions) 10
T100M
1000 ms (A1)
T
A 1 input
State
F
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 3000
Time (ms)
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 223

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Connection
224 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Checkpoint
Click
Simple Checkpoint
A1 CHECK ?
POINT
Use:
• Creates a checkpoint signal that you can check with the PLUS+1 Service Tool program.
• Route the signal that you want to check to A1; your ? entry is the signal name.
• Click the underscore (_) with the Query/Change tool to set a 0–9 PLUS+1 Service Tool
program access level to the value (0 is the highest access level).
T The ? names used in checkpoint and non-volatile dynamic memory components

must be different. Identical ? names produce a MULTI DEFINED SYMBOL compile
error.
Function:
• ? = User-defined name for the A1 signal

Valid connections
A1 ARRAY, BOOL, INT — —
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 225

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Simple Checkpoint
Log Functions in Service Tool
Engine_Hours
Reset Minute
Enable Hours
Enable_Reset Seconds
Reset Reset In Reset Out Enable Carry Out
Enable Enable In Enable Out
Minutes CHECK CP_Minutes

POINT
Carry In Carry Out
Reset
Enable Minutes Minutes
Hours CHECK CP_Hours

POINT
Carry In
Reset
Enable Hours Hours
226 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Advanced Checkpoint
A3 ACTIVE ?
A2 PREFIX
A1 CHECK
POINT
Use:
• Adds the A2 PREFIX to the ? signal name.

When copying a page, you only have to change the A2 PREFIX. You do not have to
change ? names to use the copied page.
program access level to the value. (0 is the highest access level.)
T The ? names used in checkpoint and non-volatile dynamic memory components must be
different. Identical ? names produce a MULTI DEFINED SYMBOL compile error.
Function:
• If:
− A3 = T, then the ? signal is available through the PLUS+1 Service Tool program
In the PLUS+1 Service Tool program, the ? signal name becomes the A2 PREFIX +
underscore + ? signal name
− A3 = F, then the ? signal is not available

Valid connections
A2 TL — —
A3 BOOL — —
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 227

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Advanced Checkpoint
Engine_Hours
Reset Minute
Enable Hours Engine_CP
TL
Enable Enable In Enable Out T ACTIVE Minutes
PREFIX
Minutes
CHECK
Carry In Carry Out POINT
Reset
Contents of Engine_Hours
T ACTIVE CP_Hours and Auger_Hours pages
Hours PREFIX are the same
Carry In CHECK
Reset POINT
Enable Hours Hours
Auger_Hours
Reset Minute
Enable Hours Auger_CP
TL
Enable Enable In Enable Out T ACTIVE Minutes
PREFIX
Minutes
CHECK
Reset Contents of Auger_Hours
Enable Minutes Minutes and Engine_Hours pages
T ACTIVE CP_Hours
are the same
Hours PREFIX
Carry In CHECK
Reset POINT
Enable Hours Hours
228 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Advanced Checkpoint with Namespace

NAMESPACE ?
A2 ACTIVE
A1 CHECK
POINT
Use:
• Prefixes the page’s Name Space to the ? signal name.

When copying a page, you only have to change the page’s Name Space. You do not
have to change ? names to be able to use the copied page.
T The ? names used in checkpoint and non-volatile dynamic memory components must be
different. Identical ? names produce a MULTI DEFINED SYMBOL compile error.
Function:
• If:
− A2 = T, then the ? signal is available through the PLUS+1 Service Tool program
In the PLUS+1 Service Tool program, the ? signal name becomes the page’s Name
Space + underscore + ? signal name
− A2 = F, then the ? signal is not available

Valid connections
A2 BOOL — —
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 229

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Advanced Checkpoint with Namespace

Engine name space prefix

Engine_Hours
Reset Minute
Enable Hours
NAMESPACE CP_Minutes
T ACTIVE
Minutes CHECK
Reset
Contents of Engine_Hours
NAMESPACE CP_Hours and Auger_Hours pages
Hours T ACTIVE are the same
Carry In CHECK
Reset POINT
Enable Hours Hours
Auger name space prefix

Auger_Hours
Reset Minute
Enable Hours
NAMESPACE CP_Minutes
T ACTIVE
Minutes CHECK
Reset
NAMESPACE CP_Hours
Hours
Contents of Auger_Hours
T ACTIVE
and Engine_Hours pages
Carry In CHECK
Reset POINT are the same
Enable Hours Hours
230 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Set Value
? (User name for value)
X1
? (Data type of value)
Use:
• When experimenting with values.
• Inputs values directly from the PLUS+1 Service Tool program to the controller without
having to use memory components to read and write values.
• Turning off the controller returns all values to 0.
program access level to the value. (0 is the highest access level.)
Function:
• ? = User name for the value; use this name to access the value in the PLUS+1 Service
Tool program
Valid connections
— — X1 ALL
Example—Set Value
Parameter Functions in Service Tool
Sensor_2Pt
0 Fault% Status
Hi_DBnd
Hi DBnd% Fault
Lo_DBnd U16
Lo DBnd%
U16
9000 Hi Cal%
1000
0 Lo Cal%
Snsr Pwr
Input Output
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 231

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Hardware
Click
Initialize Hardware Output

?
X1
Use:
• Writes a value to the kernel before the first program loop.

Function:
• ? = Hardware signal name (must be an exact match)—see the Application Interface

(API) specification for a list of signals
Valid connections
— — A1 ALL
232 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Hardware Input Typed

? (User name for value)
X1
? (Data type of value)
Use:
• Reads a value from the kernel into the application.

Function:

Valid connections
— — X1 ALL
Hardware Input
?
X1
Use:
• Reads a value from the kernel into the application.

Function:
• Autotyped

Valid connections
— — X1 ALL
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 233

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Hardware Output
?
A1
Use:
• Writes a value from the application to the kernel at the end of every program loop.
• To set an output just one time, before the start of the first program loop, use the
Initialize Hardware Output component (see Initialize Hardware Output on page
232).
Function:

Valid connections
A1 ALL — —
234 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Hardware Input/Output Typed

A2
? (Hardware signal name)

A1 X1
? (Data type)
T If you are creating a new application using templates developed for use with PLUS+1
GUIDE 2.1(and later), use the new CAN components (see CAN on page 242). If you are
updating an application that uses this component (typically for CAN communication), see
Using Old CAN and Memory Components on page 240.
Use:
• Switches between reading from or writing to the kernel.

Function:

• X1 = Writing to kernel if A1 =F (A1 not connected to X1)
• X1 = Reading from if A2 =T (A1 = X1)

Valid connections
A1 ALL X1 ALL
A2 BOOL
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 235

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Hardware Input/Output
A2
?
A1 X1
T If you are creating a new application using templates developed for use with PLUS+1
GUIDE 2.1(and later), use the new CAN components (see CAN on page 242). If you are
updating an application that uses this component (typically for CAN communication), see
Using Old CAN and Memory Components on page 240.
Use:
• Switches between reading from or writing to the kernel.

Function:
• Autotyped

• X1 = BIOS input if A1 = F (A1 not connected to X1)
• X1 = BIOS output if A2 = T (A1 = X1)

Valid connections
A1 ALL X1 ALL
A2 BOOL
236 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Read Output from Hardware Typed

? (Hardware signal name)
X1
? (Data type)
Use:
• Reads a BIOS output signal.

Function:

Valid connections
— — X1 ALL
Read Output from Hardware

?
X1
Use:
• Reads a BIOS output signal.
• X1 output is autotyped.
Function:

Valid connections
— — X1 ALL
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 237

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Non-Volatile Memory Input Typed
X1
?
T If you are updating an older application that uses this component, see Using Old CAN and
Memory Components on page 240.
If you are creating a new application using templates developed for use with PLUS+1
GUIDE 2.1(and later), use the new Non-Volatile Memory Dynamic components listed on
page 253.
Use:
• Connection point for a BIOS input from non-volatile memory.

Function:
• ? = BIOS hardware signal name (must be an exact match)

BIOS hardware signal name must be typed
• Replace the ALIAS with a name that you want the PLUS+1 Service Tool program to
display
The PLUS+1 Service Tool program uses the BIOS hardware name if ALIAS is not
changed
Valid connections
— — X1 INT
Example—Non-Volatile Memory Input Typed

X1 ouputs the S16 value stored in memory locationEE.s16[0].
EE.s16[0]
U8
EE_CmpVal
In the Service Tool, select the EE_CmpVal signal to view and
change the value stored in memory location EE.s16[0].
238 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Non-Volatile Memory Input/Output

?
A1
ALIAS
T If you are updating an older application that uses this component, see Using Old CAN and
Memory Components on page 240.
If you are creating a new application using templates developed for use with PLUS+1
GUIDE 2.1(and later), use the new Non-Volatile Memory Dynamic components listed on
page 253.
Use:
• Connection point for a BIOS output to non-volatile memory.

Function:
• A1 = BIOS hardware signal name (must be an exact match)
• ? = Software location of data
• Replace ALIAS with a name that you want the PLUS+1 Service Tool program to display
The PLUS+1 Service Tool program uses the BIOS (EE.s nn[n]) hardware name if ALIAS is
not changed.
Valid connections
A1 ALL — —
Example—Non-Volatile Memory Input/Output
ECU_EEPROM F
SET_EE
WR_EE0 EEWR
ALL
SET_DEF
F
DEF_VALUE
0
EE_NeutVal
EE.s16[0]
EE_NeutVal
In the Service Tool, select the EE_NeutVal signal to view and

change the value stored in memory location EE.s16[0].
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 239

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Using Old CAN and Memory Components

This table lists old and new CAN and memory (EEprom) components. PLUS+1 GUIDE 2.1
software replaced the Old components with the New components.
Old and New CAN and Memory components

Old New
Non-Volatile Memory Input Transmit CAN
Non-Volatile Memory Input Typed Receive CAN with Filter
Hardware Input/Output Typed Receive CAN with ID Mask
Hardware Input/Output Typed Receive CAN Basic
Non-Volatile Memory Dynamic with Default
Non-Volatile Memory Dynamic
Non-Volatile Memory Input
• Applications created using templates developed for use with PLUS+1 GUIDE 2.1 (and
later) software must use the New components.
• You must change System file parameters from NEW to OLD to enable PLUS+1 GUIDE
2.1 (and later) software to compile applications with the Old components listed in this
table. See Change from New to Old CAN and Memory Components on page 241.
• PLUS+1 GUIDE 2.1(and later) software with System file parameters set to OLD cannot
compile applications with the New components listed in this table.
240 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Change from New to Old CAN and Memory Components
1 2
To change the System file parameters from NEW to OLD:
1. In the View menu, click Default Layout to display the Project Manager and
Inspector tabs.
2. In the Project Manager tab, click the System file.
3. In the Inspector tab, click to display the Edit System Parameters window.
4. In the Edit System Parameters window, click OLD.
5. In the Edit System Parameters window, click OK.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 241

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
CAN
Click
242 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Transmit CAN
A7 CAN-PORT
A6 EXT
A5 RTR
A4 ID
TX
A3 LENGTH
A2 DATA[ ] OVERRUN X2
A1 SEND PENDING X1
T If you are updating an application that was created before the release of PLUS+1 GUIDE
2.1 software, see Using Old CAN and Memory Components on page 240 before using this
component.
Use:
• Transmits CAN messages.

Function:
• A1 = Message on A2 transmits when T
• A2 = Array of message data field, read from data byte 0
• A3 = Data length code, number of bytes (0–8) in the data field
• A4 = Message ID (identifier field)
• A5—If:
− A5 = T, RTR (Remote Transmission Request flag set (not supported in J1939)

− A5 = F, RTR flag not set
• A6—If:
− A6 = F, standard 11-bit message ID field (CAN 2.0A)

− A6 = T, extended 29-bit message ID field (CAN 2.0B)
• A7—Connect to the CAN port defined by the hardware file (Refer to your hardware’s
API document)
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 243

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
• X1—If:
− X1 = T, message pending
− X1 = F, no message pending
• X2—If:
− X2 = F, no overrun
− X2 = T, new message (A1 = T), with pending message not sent (X1 is T); messages
not sent are lost
Valid connections
A1 BOOL X1 BOOL
A2 ARRAY[]U8 X2 BOOL
A3 INT
A4 UINT
A5 BOOL
A6 BOOL
A7 PORT
T The Example—Receive CAN Basic on page 251 uses this component.
244 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Receive CAN with Filter

A9 CAN-PORT
A8 EXT
A7 RTR
A6 ID
RX
A5 ID-MASK OVERRUN X5
A4 DATA[ ] ID X4
A3 DATA[ ]-MASK LENGTH X3
A2 LEN-MASK DATA[ ] X2
A1 PROTECTED UPDATED X1
2.1 software, see Using Old CAN and Memory Components on page 240 before using this
component.
Use:
• Receive CAN messages.
• Apply masking to ID input.
• Apply masking to DATA input.

Function:
• A1—If:
− A1 = T, saves the first message received in the program loop; following messages
do not overwrite the first message
− A1 = F, saves the last message received in the program loop; the last message
overwrites any preceding message
• A2 = Number of bytes in DATA[ ]-MASK to use
• A3 = Mask applied to A4 data
• A4 = Data
• A5 = Mask applied to message ID (identifier field)
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 245

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
• A7—If:
− A7 = T, receives only transmission request (RTR) messages

− A7 = F, does not receive RTR messages
• A8—If:

• A9—Connect to the port signal on the CAN bus as defined by the hardware file:
• X1—If:
− X1 = T, new message received since last program loop

− X1 = F, no new messages received since last program loop
• X2 = Array of message data field, read from data byte 0
• X3 = Data length code, number of bytes (0–8) in the data field
• X4 = Message ID
• X5—If:
− X5 = T, more than one message received during program loop

Valid connections
A1 BOOL X1 BOOL
A2 UINT X2 ARRAY [8] U8
A3 ARRAY [ ] U8 X3 U8
A4 ARRAY [ ] U8 X4 U32
A5 UINT X5 BOOL
A6 UINT
A7 BOOL
A8 BOOL
A9 PORT
246 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Receive CAN with ID Mask

A5 CAN-PORT OVERRUN X5
A4 EXT ID X4
RX
A3 ID LENGTH X3
A2 MASK DATA[ ] X2
2.1 software, see Using Old CAN and Memory Components on page 240 before using
this component.
Use:
• Receive CAN messages.
• Apply masking to message ID input.

Function:
• A1—If:
• A2 = Defines mask applied to message ID (identifier field); if a mask bit is 0, then it is a

“do not care”
• A4—If:

• A5—Connect to the port signal on the CAN bus as defined by the hardware file (Refer
to your hardware’s API document)
• X1—If:

10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 247

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
• X3 = Data length code, the number of bytes (0–8) in the data field
• X4 = Actual message ID
• X5—If:

Valid connections
A1 BOOL X1 BOOL
A2 UINT X2 ARRAY [8] U8
A3 UINT X3 U8
A4 BOOL X4 UINT
A5 PORT X5 BOOL
248 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Receive CAN Basic

A4 CAN-PORT OVERRUN X4
A3 EXT LENGTH X3
RX
A2 ID DATA[ ] X2
this component.
Use:
• Receives CAN messages.

Function:
• A1—If:
• A3—If:

• A4—Connect to the port signal on the CAN bus as defined by the hardware file:
− CAN_0 bus for MC024 Microcontroller

− CAN_0 bus or CAN_1 bus for MC050 Microcontroller
• X1—If:

• X3 = Data length code, number of bytes (0–8) in the data field
• X4—If:
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 249

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components

− X 4 = F, no overrun
Valid connections
A1 BOOL X1 BOOL
A2 UINT X2 ARRAY[8]U8
A3 BOOL X3 U8
A4 PORT X4 BOOL
250 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Receive CAN Basic

In Unit 1, the:
• Transmit CAN component (TX) broadcasts messages with an ID of 0x001.
• Receive CAN Basic component (RX) receives messages with an ID of 0x002.

In Unit 2, the:
• Transmit CAN component (TX) broadcasts messages with an ID of 0x002.
• Receive CAN Basic component (RX) receives messages with an ID of 0x001.
Unit 1 Inputs CAN_0

Node: 0
Broadcasts messages with an ID of 0x001
Net: 0 Port
CAN-PORT
F EXT
RTR
Message ID
0x001
ID TX
U16
Number of bytes in message data field 4 LENGTH
Message data field: array with 4 bytes DATA[ ] OVERRUN
Use a rising edge to transmit message SEND PENDING Wired to AND and NOT components so that
a pending message must transmit before
you can send a new message
Port Receives messages with an ID of 0x002

Selects the CAN port CAN-PORT OVERRUN
F EXT LENGTH
0x002 RX
Message ID ID DATA[ ] Message data field: array with 3 bytes
U16
F PROTECTED UPDATED
Unit 2 Inputs
CAN_0
Node: 1
Net: 0 Port Broadcasts messages with an ID of 0x002
CAN-PORT
F EXT CAN bus
RTR
Message ID 0x002
ID TX
U16
Number of bytes in message data field 3 LENGTH
Message data field: array with 3 bytes DATA[ ] OVERRUN
SEND PENDING
Port Receives messages with an ID of 0x001

CAN-PORT OVERRUN
F EXT LENGTH
0x001 RX
Message ID ID DATA[ ] Message data field: array with 4 bytes
U16
F PROTECTED UPDATED
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 251

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
For information about using:
• Set Array Element components to construct a message data field that contains
dynamic run-time values see Example 2—Set Array Element on page 187.
• Get Array Element components to output individual elements within a message data
field; see Example 2 on page Example 2—Get Array Element on page 185.
252 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Click
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 253

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Non-Volatile Memory Dynamic with Default

A6 DEFAULT ? (User name for memory value)
A5 DEF ENABLE
A4 IN
A3 IN_ENABLE
A2 READ_ PEND X2
A1 WRITE_ VAL X1
? (Data type of X1 output)
this component.
Use:
• Read and write non-volatile memory values.
• Write default values to memory.
• On hardware power-up, the value in memory copies to X1.

Function:
• ? = Your name for the memory value; in the PLUS+1 Service Tool program, use this
name to access the memory value
• A1 = When T, the X1 value writes to memory
• A2 = When T, the value in memory copies to X1
• A3 = When T, the A4 value copies to X1
• A4 = New value
• A6 = Default value
• X1 = Value read from memory/value to be written to memory
• X2 = When T, pending completion of writing X1 value to memory
254 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Valid connections
A1 BOOL X1 INT, BOOL
A2 BOOL X2 BOOL
A3 BOOL
A4 INT, BOOL
A5 BOOL
A6 INT, BOOL
Example 1—Non-Volatile Memory Dynamic with Default

EE_Example
DEFAULT
DEF ENABLE
Read and write values to memory
IN
IN_ENABLE
READ_ PEND
WRITE_ VAL 3500
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 255

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example 2—Non-Volatile Memory Dynamic with Default

1 Power-upValue in memory copies to VAL 2 IN copies to VAL 3 VAL writes to memory; PEND goes T
3500 DEFAULT EE_Example 3500 DEFAULT EE_Example 3500 DEFAULT EE_Example
F DEF ENABLE F DEF ENABLE F DEF ENABLE

3222 IN 3222 IN 3222 IN
F IN_ENABLE T/F IN_ENABLE F IN_ENABLE
F READ_ PEND F F READ_ PEND F F READ_ PEND T
F WRITE_ VAL 3645 F WRITE_ VAL 3222 T/F WRITE_ VAL 3222
4 Write ends; PEND goes F
3500 DEFAULT EE_Example
F DEF ENABLE
3222 IN
F IN_ENABLE
F READ_ PEND F
F WRITE_ VAL 3222
1 IN copies to VAL 2 Value in memory copies back to VAL
3500 DEFAULT EE_Example 3500 DEFAULT EE_Example
F DEF ENABLE F DEF ENABLE

3444 IN 3444 IN
T/F IN_ENABLE F IN_ENABLE
F READ_ PEND F T/F READ_ PEND F
F WRITE_ VAL 3444 F WRITE_ VAL 3222
1 DEFAULT copies to VAL 2 VAL writes to memory; PEND goes T 3 Write ends; PEND goes F
3500 DEFAULT EE_Example 3500 DEFAULT EE_Example 3500 DEFAULT EE_Example

T/F DEF ENABLE F DEF ENABLE F DEF ENABLE
3444 IN 3444 IN 3444 IN
F IN_ENABLE F IN_ENABLE F IN_ENABLE
F READ_ PEND F F READ_ PEND T F READ_ PEND F
F WRITE_ VAL 3500 T/F WRITE_ VAL 3500 F WRITE_ VAL 3500
256 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components

A4 IN ? (User name for memory value)
A3 IN_ENABLE
A2 READ_ PEND X2
A1 WRITE_ VAL X1
? (Data type of X1 output)
this component.
Use:
• Read and write non-volatile memory values.
• On hardware power-up, the value in memory copies to X1.

Function:
• ? = Your name for the memory value; in the PLUS+1 Service Tool program, use this
name to access the memory value
• A1 = When T, the X1 value writes to memory
• A2 = When T, the value in memory copies to X1
• A4 = New value
• X1 = Value read from memory/value to be written to memory
• X2 = When T, pending completion of writing X1 value to memory

Valid connections
A1 BOOL X1 INT, BOOL
A2 BOOL X2 BOOL
A3 BOOL
A4 INT, BOOL
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 257

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example 1—Non-Volatile Memory Dynamic

IN EE_Example
Read and write values to memory
IN_ENABLE
READ_ PEND
WRITE_ VAL 3500
Example 2—Non-Volatile Memory Dynamic

1 Power-upValue in memory copies to VAL 2 IN copies to VAL
3500 IN EE_Example 3500 IN EE_Example
F IN_ENABLE T/F IN_ENABLE
F READ_ PEND F F READ_ PEND F
3 VAL writes to memory; PEND goes T 4 Write ends, PEND goes F

F IN_ENABLE F IN_ENABLE
F READ_ PEND T F READ_ PEND F
T/F WRITE_ VAL 3500 F WRITE_ VAL 3500
1 IN copies to VAL 2 Value in memory copies to VAL

T/F IN_ENABLE F IN_ENABLE
F READ_ PEND F T/F READ_ PEND F
258 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Non-Volatile Memory Dynamic Input

NV ? (User-defined name for memory value)
X1
? (Data type for X1 output)
this component.
Use:
• Read a value from a memory location.

Function:
• ? = Your name for the memory value; use this name to access the memory value in the
PLUS+1 Service Tool program
• X1 = Value from memory location

Valid connections
X1 INT, BOOL
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 259

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Module
260 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Module Single Wire
Click
Module Input
? (User-defined signal name)
X1
Use:
• Input point for a module signal.
Function:
• ? = User-defined signal name
• X1 = Input signal
Valid connections
— — X1 ALL
Module Output
? (User-defined signal name)
X1
Use:
• Output for a module signal.

Function:
• X1 = Output signal
Valid connections
— — X1 ALL
T See Example 1—Call Module on page 264 for an example of how to use this
component.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 261

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Configurable Module Connection

A2 OUTPUT ? (User-defined signal name)
A1 PREFIX X1
? (Data type for X1 output)
Use:
• Makes a connection between two modules:
− Outputs a signal from a module.

− Inputs the same signal to another module.
Use the Export Block and Import Block commands to export and import
connections.
Function:
• If:
− A2 = T, then X1 = Output signal to another module

− A2 = F, then X1 = Input signal from another module
− X1 signal name is the value of A1 + underscore (_) + name of X1. The signal name
becomes global
Valid connections
A1 TL X1 ALL
A2 BOOL
Example—Configurable Module Connection

Module 1 Module 2
T OUTPUT
A_ADD
A PREFIX F OUTPUT
S16 A_ADD
A PREFIX A
S16
=
B
ADD
A_ADD signal outputs from Module 1 A_ADD signal inputs to Module 2
262 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Module Bus
Click
Module Bus Input

?
X1
Use:
• Input for a module bus.

Function:
• ? = User-defined bus name
• X1 = Bus output
Valid connections
— — X1 ALL
T See Example 2—Call Module on page 266 for an example that uses this component.
Module Bus Output

?
X1
Use:
• Output for a module bus.

Function:
• ? = User-defined bus name
• X1= Bus input

Valid connections
— — X1 ALL
T See Example 2—Call Module on page 266 for an example that uses this component.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 263

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Call Module
A1
Use:
• Executes a module, without parameters in the call, contained in another file.

Function:
• Replace NAME ? with a user-defined module name
The name that you enter must match the Module name for the Module.scs file.
(The Module name is a property of the Module.scs file. The Inspector tab displays
this Module name when you click the Module.scs file in the Project Manager tab.)
• Replace COMMENT with a user comment string
• If:
− A1 = T components in the module identified by NAME ? execute

− A1 = F no components in the module identified by NAME ? execute
• Do not call the same function more than once in the main loop
• If the module is not called, module output values remain set
• Whatever output values apply when A1 goes from T to F, also apply when A1 goes
from F to T
• Each call overwrites existing values in the memory
T See Example 1—Call Module below and Example 2—Call Module on page 266 for
examples of how to use this component.
Example 1—Call Module

The following figure shows how to use the Module Input Typed, Module Output, and
Call Module components to create a module.
264 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
How to Add a Module
Inspector tab properties for Module.scs file

Right-click
Click
Click to return to Main module

Must match NAME entry in
Click to go to Module Call Module component
Main Module to Module Signal Flow
Main Module (in Application Page) PRE

U16
Steer L_Fwd
T Module1 PRE
U16
Dual Path Module L_Rvs
Speed
PRE
U16
R_Fwd
Sig PRE
na U16
ls b R_Rvs
ack
to
Ma
in m
od
e
ule
ul
od
M
CHECK CP_Steer Module1

o
L_Fwd
tt
POINT
ou
PRE
s
U16
al
gn
Dual_Path Valve_Driver
L_Rvs
Si
Steer
Steer L Valve L Valve L_Fwd
L_Rvs
R_Fwd
R_Fwd
Speed
Speed R Valve R Valve R_Rvs
R_Rvs
PRE
U16 CHECK CP_Speed
POINT
Components Used in Creating a Module
PRE Predefine TypeDefines the data type of Module Input

Module InputBrings a signal into a module
signals connected to hardware; Defines the data type of
Module Ouput signals connected to checkpoints
Module OutputOutputs a signal from a module
True calls
module in compile T Module1 NAME entryMust match Module name in Inspector tab for Module.scs file
Enter a comment (optional)
Call ModuleDirects signals to and from the external module
Compile Buttons in the Toolbar

Compiles all modules Compiles only modules that you have changed
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 265

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example 2—Call Module

The following figure shows how to use the Module Bus Input, Module Bus Output, and
Call Module components to create a module.
How to Add a Module
Inspector tab properties for Module.scs file

Right-click
Click
Click to return to Main module

Must match NAME entry in
Click to go to Module Call Module component
Main Module to Module1 Signal Flow
Main Module (in Application Page)

Inputs Steer_Speed Steer_Speed Fwd_Rvs Fwd_Rvs
T Module1
Dual Path Module Sig
na
le ls b
u ack Outputs
od to
M Ma
o
tt in m
ou od
als ule
Sign
Module
L_Fwd
DUAL_PATH VALVE_DRIVER
Steer
Steer L Valve L Valve L_Fwd L_Rvs
L_Rvs R_Fwd
R_Fwd
Speed R_Rvs
Speed R Valve R Valve R_Rvs
Components Used in Creating a Module
Module Bus InputBrings a bus into a module
Module Bus OutputOutputs a bus from a module

True calls
module in compile T Module1 NAME entryMust match Module name in Inspector tab for Module.scs file
Enter a comment (optional)
Call ModuleDirects buses to and from the external module
Compile Buttons in Toolbar
Compiles all modules Compiles only modules that you have changed
266 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Manage
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 267

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Generate Compiler Error on Range

CREATE COMPILER ERROR OUTSIDE
A1 RANGE LOW? HIGH?
MSG:?
Use:
• Aborts the compile process when the compiler finds an out-of-range constant value.
• Displays a user-defined error message in the Error Messages tab.
• Prevents a user from entering a value that compiles but causes erratic operation when
downloaded.
(For example, a joystick calibration value that is too high would compile successfully
but might cause erratic machine operation when downloaded.
Function:
• A1 = Constant value
• Low? = Click with Query/Change to enter the low value for the range
• High? = Click with Query/Change to enter the high value for the range
• MSG? = Click with Query/Change to enter the error message that displays if A1 is out
of range
Valid connections
A1 INT — —
Example—Generate Compiler Error on Range

CREATE COMPILER ERROR OUTSIDE
RANGE LOW 1000 HIGH 1200
MSG: Joystick Cal Val Out of Range
Cal value (too high) 1500
Custom error message
268 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Generate Compiler Error on Not Constant

CREATE COMPILER ERROR ON
A1 TYPE NOT CONSTANT
MSG:?
Use:
• Aborts the compile process when the compiler finds variable value instead of a
constant value.
• Displays a user-defined error message in the Error Messages tab.
downloaded.
Function:
• A1 = Constant data type (any other data type aborts the compile)
• MSG? = Click with Query/Change to enter the error message that displays if A1 is a
variable value instead of a constant value
Valid connections
A1 ALL — —
Example—Generate Compiler Error on Not Constant

TYPE NOT CONSTANT
MSG: Must be a constant value.
C2P02_Voltage
(This value should originate from constant)
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 269

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Generate Compiler Error on Type

A1 TYPE DIFFERS FROM?
MSG:?
Use:
• Aborts the compile process when the compiler finds an incorrect data type.
• Displays a user-defined, custom error message in the Error Messages tab.
downloaded.
Function:
• A1 = Data type
• TYPE DIFFERS FROM? = Click with Query/Change to enter the allowed data type (any
other data type aborts compile)
• MSG? = Click with Query/Change to enter the error message that displays if A1 is an
incorrect data type
Valid connections
A1 ALL — —
Example—Generate Compiler Error on Type

TYPE NOT CONSTANT S16
MSG: Data type must be S16.
2500
U16
270 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Predefine Type
PRE X1
?
Use:
• Defines the data type of a signal that does not have a data type.
− Needed to define the data type of a Module Input signal routed to a hardware
output.
− Needed to define the data type of a Module Output signal routed to a

Checkpoint component.
• Force connecting the correct signal to an input or output.
− A signal that you route to a predefined signal must either have no data type or a
matching data type; otherwise you get a compiler error.
Function:
• X1 = Outputs the ?data type

Valid connections
— — X1 ALL
T Also see Example 1—Call Module on page 264 for another example of how to use this
component.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 271

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Predefine Type
Define the data type of Module Input signals routed to hardware
PRE
U16
L_Fwd
Module Input signals
PRE
U16
L_Rvs
PRE
U16
R_Fwd
PRE
U16
R_Rvs To hardware
Outputs
Define the data type of Module Output signals routed to Checkpoints

PRE CHECK CP_Steer
U16 POINT
Module Output signals Steer
Speed
PRE CHECK CP_Speed

U16 POINT
272 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Access
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 273

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Access App Log Enable

A1 APPLOG ENABLE
T Contact Sauer-Danfoss for more information about using this component.
Disable Raw Applog Data Readout

DISABLE APPLOG RAW DATA READOUT
274 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Accessrights App Log Diagnostics

A1 APPLOG DIAG ACCESS
Use:
• Sets the PLUS+1 Service Tool program’s access to diagnostic data in an application
data log.
The Application Log components create application data logs. These logs contain
access history data, diagnostic data, error data, and “other” data. Each type of data has
a separate access level that you can set from 0 to 9.
The A1 value of the APP-LOG DIAG ACCESS component works with the diagnostic
data’s access level to limit the Service Tool program’s access to diagnostic data.
Function:
• A1 can range from 0–9
• The PLUS+1 Service Tool:
− Can view diagnostic data that has an access level ≥ A1

− Cannot view diagnostic data that has an access level < A1
• Sets access rights for all application data logs in an application
• Can be placed anywhere in an application

Valid connections
A1 INT — —
Diagnostic data viewing rights
A1 Access Value Service Tool Can View Diagnostic Data with These Access Levels
0 APP-LOG DIAG ACCESS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

3 APP-LOG DIAG ACCESS — — — 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
6 APP-LOG DIAG ACCESS — — — — — — 6 7 8 9
9 APP-LOG DIAG ACCESS — — — — — — — — — 9
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 275

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Accessrights App Log Errors

A1 APPLOG ERROR ACCESS
Use:
• Sets the PLUS+1 Service Tool program’s rights to access error data in an application
data log.
The A1 value of the APP-LOG ERROR ACCESS component works with the error data’s
access level to limit the Service Tool program’s access to error data.
Function:
− Can view error data that has an access level ≥ A1

− Cannot view error data that has an access level < A1

Valid connections
A1 INT — —
Error data viewing rights
A1 Access Value Service Tool Can View Error Data with These Access Levels
0 APP-LOG ERROR ACCESS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

3 APP-LOG ERROR ACCESS — — — 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
6 APP-LOG ERROR ACCESS — — — — — — 6 7 8 9
9 APP-LOG ERROR ACCESS — — — — — — — — — 9
276 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Accessrights App Log Others

A1 APPLOG OTHERS ACCESS
Use:
• Sets the PLUS+1 Service Tool program’s rights to access “other” (miscellaneous) data
in an application data log.
The A1 value of the APP-LOG OTHERS ACCESS component works with the “other”
data’s access level to limit the Service Tool program’s access to “other” data.
Function:
− Can view “other” data that has an access level ≥ A1

− Cannot view “other” data that has an access level < A1

Valid connections
A1 INT — —
“Other” data viewing rights
A1 Access Value Service Tool Can View “Other” Data with These Access Levels
0 APP-LOG OTHERS ACCESS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

3 APP-LOG OTHERS ACCESS — — — 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
6 APP-LOG OTHERS ACCESS — — — — — — 6 7 8 9
9 APP-LOG OTHERS ACCESS — — — — — — — — — 9
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 277

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Accessrights History
A1 HISTORY ACCESS
Use:
• Sets the PLUS+1 Service Tool program’s rights to view access history data in an
application data log.
The A1 value of the HISTORY ACCESS component works with the access history
data’s access level to limit the Service Tool program’s ability to view access history
data.
Function:
− Can view access history data that has an access level ≥ A1

− Cannot view access history data that has an access level < A1
• Overrides all access rights set within the PLUS+1 GUIDE Service Tool
Valid connections
A1 INT — —
History data viewing rights
A1 Access Value Service Tool Can View History Data with These Access Levels
0 HISTORY ACCESS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3 HISTORY ACCESS — — — 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
6 HISTORY ACCESS — — — — — — 6 7 8 9
9 HISTORY ACCESS — — — — — — — — — 9
278 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Accessrights Read
A1 READ ACCESS
Use:
• Works with password logic to limit a user’s ability to read component values with the
PLUS+1 Service Tool program.
Some PLUS+1 components—such as the Checkpoint and Memory components—

have a read rights feature. Their read rights can range from 0 to 9.
The A1 value applied the Read Access component works with the read rights set on
individual components to limit the values that a user can read with the Service Tool.
Function:
• Using the PLUS+1 Service Tool, a user:
− Can read the value of any component whose read right ≥ A1

− Cannot read the value of any component whose read right < A1
• Sets read rights for all components in an application
• Overrides all read rights set within the PLUS+1 GUIDE Service Tool
Valid connections
A1 INT — —
Read rights
With an A1 Value* Service Tool Can Read Values from Components with these Read Rights
0 READ ACCESS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3 READ ACCESS — — — 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
6 READ ACCESS — — — — — — 6 7 8 9
9 READ ACCESS — — — — — — — — — 9
*Typically set with password logic.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 279

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Accessrights Write
A1 WRITE ACCESS
Use:
• Works with password logic to limit a user’s ability to write values to components with
the PLUS+1 Service Tool program.
Some PLUS+1 components—such as Memory components—have a write rights

feature. Their write rights can range from 0 to 9.
The A1 value applied the Write Access component works with individual component
write right to limit the values that a user can write to (change) using the Service Tool.
Function:
• With the PLUS+1 Service Tool, a user:
− Can write a value to any component whose write right ≥ A1

− Cannot write a value to any component whose write right < A1
• Sets write rights for all components in an application
• Overrides all right rights set within the PLUS+1 GUIDE Service Tool
Valid connections
A1 INT — —
Write rights
With an A1 Value* Service Tool Can Write Values to Components with these Write Rights
0 WRITE ACCESS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3 WRITE ACCESS — — — 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
6 WRITE ACCESS — — — — — — 6 7 8 9
9 WRITE ACCESS — — — — — — — — — 9
*Typically set with password logic.
280 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Read Access and Write Access

The examples on this and on the following pages show how the Read Access and Write
Access components used with password logic can limit a user’s ability to read and write
application values with the PLUS+1 GUIDE Service Tool program.
The example below shows what happens when a user enters either a wrong password or
no password at all with the Service Tool.
The password logic in this example applies a value of 9 to the Write Access and Read
Access components. The Service Tool can only read and write to Memory components
with read and write values of 9. (No components here have a read or write value of 9).
A user with either no password or the wrong password:
• Cannot view or change any application values.

Passwords
111 = Application engineer
No password/wrong password:
555 = Service technician
No read or write rights to any values
888 = Rental dealer
Password logic
No password/wrong password A
111 B
=
A
555 B
=
A
888 B
= 1
WRITE ACCESS
5 9
8
READ ACCESS
9
IN EE_Limit_Lo IN EE_Limit_Hi
Memory components
IN_ENABLE IN_ENABLE
READ 1 PEND READ 1 PEND
WRITE 1 VAL WRITE 1 VAL
IN EE_Cal_Lo IN EE_Cal_Hi
IN_ENABLE IN_ENABLE
IN EE_Total_Hrs IN EE_Rental_Hrs
IN_ENABLE IN_ENABLE
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 281

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
The example below shows what happens when an application engineer enters a password
of 111 with the PLUS+1 GUIDE Service Tool.
Access components. A value of 1 lets the Service Tool read and write to all Memory
components with read and write values of 1 or greater.
The application engineer:
• Can view and change all application values.
Passwords
111 = Application engineer Application engineer password:
555 = Service technician Read and write rights to EE_Limit_Lo
888 = Rental dealer and EE_Limit_Hi values
Read and write rights to EE_Cal_Lo and
EE_Cal_Hi values
Read and write rights to EE_Total_Hrs
and EE_Rental_Hrs values
Password logic
Application engineer password
111 A
111 B
=
A
555 B
= T
A
888 B
= 1
WRITE ACCESS
5 1
8
READ ACCESS
9
IN_ENABLE IN_ENABLE
Memory components
IN_ENABLE IN_ENABLE
IN_ENABLE IN_ENABLE
282 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
The example below shows what happens when a service technician enters a password of
555 with the PLUS+1 GUIDE Service Tool.
The service technician:
• Cannot view or change limits.
• Can view and change calibration values.
• Can view and change (reset) total run hours.
• Can view and change (reset) rental hours.
Passwords
111 = Application engineer Service technician password:
555 = Service technician No read or write rights to
EE_Limit_Lo and
888 = Rental dealer EE_Limit_Hi values
Read and write rights to
Password logic EE_Cal_Lo and EE_Cal_Hi
values
Service technician password Read and write rights to
EE_Total_Hrs and
A EE_Rental_Hrs values
111 B
=
555 A
555 B
=
T
A
888 B
= 1
WRITE ACCESS
5 5
8
READ ACCESS
9
Memory components IN_ENABLE IN_ENABLE
IN_ENABLE IN_ENABLE
IN_ENABLE IN_ENABLE
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 283

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
The example below shows what happens when a rental dealer enters a password of 888
with the PLUS+1 GUIDE Service Tool.
The rental dealer:
• Cannot view or change limits.
• Cannot view or change calibration values.
• Can view but not change (reset) total run hours.
• Can view and change (reset) rental hours.
Passwords
111 = Application engineer Rental dealer password:
555 = Service technician No read or write rights to EE_Limit_Lo and
EE_Limit_Hi values
888 = Rental dealer
No read or write rights to EE_Cal_Lo and
EE_Cal_Hi values
Password logic
No read or write rights to EE_Cal_Lo and
Rental dealer password EE_Cal_Hi values
Read-only rights to EE_Total_Hrs value
A
111 B
= Read and write rights to EE_Total_Hrs value
555 B
=
888
A
888 B
= T
1
WRITE ACCESS
5 8
8
READ ACCESS
9
Memory components
IN_ENABLE IN_ENABLE
IN_ENABLE IN_ENABLE
IN_ENABLE IN_ENABLE
284 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Read-only Parameter
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 285

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Open Parameter Set
X1
Use:
• Marks the start of a set of read-only parameter inputs.

Function:
• X1 = T if the parameters in a read-only parameters lhx file matches the parameters in

the application
− TYPE name, parameter names, parameter order, and data types must match
− Program the application so that a T output from this component writes values in
the read-only parameters lhx file to the controller
• X1 = F if the parameters in a read-only parameters lhx file do not match the

parameters in the application
− Program the application to deal with an F output from this component

• TYPE = Replace with a user-friendly name for the parameter set
T See Example—Read-only Parameter Input on page 290 for an example of how to use
this component. Also see Create a Read-only Parameters File on page 373 for a
detailed, step-by-step procedure that describes how to use this component.
Valid connections
— INT X1 BOOL
286 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Close Parameter Set
Use:
• Marks the end of a set of read-only parameters.

Function:
• COMMENT = Replace with a useful comment.
Valid connections
— — — —
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 287

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Connection
Read-only Parameter Input with Namespace
X1
Use:
• Inputs a read-only parameter to an application.
• When copying a parameter set, you only have to change the block’s Name Space.
You do not have to change individual? parameter names
Function:
• Prefixes the block’s Name Space to the ? parameter name
• ? = Name of the parameter
• X1 = Parameter value input from a read-only parameters lhx file
T See Example—Read-only Parameter Input with Namespace on page 291 for an

example of how to use this component
Valid connections
— — X1 INT, BOOL
288 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Read-only Parameter Input
X1
Use:
• Inputs a read-only parameter to an application.

Function:
? = Name of the parameter
X1 = Parameter value input from a read-only parameters lhx file
Valid connections
— — X1 INT, BOOL
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 289

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Read-only Parameter Input

The following example shows:
• The source files for read-only parameters lhx files as they appear in Microsoft Excel.
• That the PARAMETER OPEN component outputs a T for a valid read-only parameters
lhx file and an F for an invalid read-only parameters lhx file.
• How T inputs to the Switch 2 components cause these components to apply the
read-only parameter values of 4500, 7500, and T.
• How F inputs to the Switch 2 components cause these components to apply the
internal values of 0, 0, and F.
Valid Read-only Parameter lhx FilePARAMETER OPEN X1 = T
Comma-separated
surce file for the T
read-only Setup_Values
parameters lhx file
Cal_Low
4500
0
U16
Cal_Hi
7500
0
NamesOK U16
Data typesOK
OrderOK Fault_Detect
T
F
BOOL
Invalid Read-only Parameter lhx FilePARAMETER OPEN X1 = F
F
Setup_Values
Cal_Low
0
0
U16
Cal_Hi
0
0
NamesOK U16
Data typesOK
Fault_Detect
OrderNot OK
F
F
BOOL
290 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Read-only Parameter Input with Namespace

The following example shows:
• The source file for the read-only parameters lhx file as it appears in Microsoft Excel.
• That each parameter name in the source file has a Name Space prefix.
Sensor_1
Values
T Values
Setup_Values
Comma-separated surce fil
for theread-only parameters lhx file Cal_Low Cal_Low1
1500
0
U16
Cal_Hi Cal_Hi1
3500
0
U16
Snsr1 Name Space prefix

Except for output signal names,
Sensor_1 and Sensor_2 blocks are the same.
Snsr2 Name Space prefix

Sensor_2
Values
T Values
Setup_Values
Cal_Low Cal_Low2
4500
0
U16
Cal_Hi Cal_Hi2
7500
0
U16
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 291

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Display
292 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Define Window
A8 FILE
A7 PORT
A6 COLOR
A5 XMAX
A4 XMIN
A3 YMIN
A2 YMAX
A1 OPEN
Use:
• Defines a window in which graphic elements appear.
T This component supports graphical terminal applications that were created before the
Screen Editor became available. The Screen Editor does not use this component.
Function:
• Assigns a file to a hardware port.
• If:
− A1 = 0 window displays
− A1 = 1 window does not display
• A2–A5 define the minimum and maximum window size in pixels:
− A2 = Maximum window size on the y-axis

− A3 = Minimum window size on the y-axis
− A4 = Maximum window size on the x-axis
− A5 = Minimum window size on the x-axis
• A6 = Window color
• A7 = Hardware port that outputs the window
• A8 = Assigned file name
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 293

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Valid connections
Pin Type Pin Type
A1 BOOL — —
A2 UINT
A3–A5 INT
A6 COL
A7 PORT
A8 FILE
294 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Line
A9 FILE
A8 COLOR
A7 WIDTH
A6 X0
A5 Y0
A4 X1
A3 Y1
A2 PRIORITY
A1 ENABLE X1
Use:
• Displays a line in a window defined by IF_ASSIGN.
Function:
• If:
− A1 = 0, then X1 = 0 the line does not display

− A1 = 1, then X1 = 1 enables the display of the line
• A2 = Display priority of the line
• A3–A6 position the line in the window defined by IF_ASSIGN:
− A3 = Y-axis starting position of the line in pixels

− A4 = X-axis starting position of the line in pixels
− A5 = Y-axis ending position of the line in pixels
− A6 = X-axis position ending position of the line in pixels
• A7 = Line width in pixels; line centers between the points defined by A3–A6
• A8 = Line color
• A9 = FILE name assigned to IF_ASSIGN
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 295

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Valid connections
Pin Type Pin Type
A1 BOOL X1 BOOL
A2 UINT
A3–A6 INT
A7 UINT
A8 FILE
A9 BOOL
296 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Graphic
A8 IMAGE
A7 FILE
A6 COLOR
A5 X
A4 Y
A3 ROTATION
A2 PRIORITY
A1 ENABLE X1
Use:
• Displays an image file (such as ***.bmp) in a window defined by IF_ASSIGN.
Function:
• If:
− A1 = 0, then X1 = 0 the image file does not display

− A1 = 1, then X1 = 1 display of the image file enabled
• A2 = Display priority of the image file
• A3 = Degrees ccw that the image file rotates
• A4–A5 position the image file in the window defined by IF_ASSIGN:
− A4 = Y-axis position of the image file in pixels

− A5 = X-axis position of the image file in pixels
• A6 = Background color of the image file; use with a monochrome image file displayed
on a color display
• A8 = File name given to the image file in the Image Register Editor
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 297

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Valid connections
Pin Type Pin Type
A1 BOOL X1 BOOL
A2 UINT
A3–A5 INT
A6 COL
A7 FILE
A8 IMG
298 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Text Label
? X1
Use:
• References an external TL data type signal.
Function:
• X1 = Where ? is a user-defined name

Valid connections
Pin Type Pin Type
— — X1 TEXT
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 299

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Graphic Label
? X1
Use:
• References an external PXO data type signal.
Function:
• X1 = Where ? is a user-defined name

Valid connections
Pin Type Pin Type
— — X1 PXO
300 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
String
Click
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 301

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
String
A8 STRING
A7 FILE
A6 FONT
A5 COLOR
A4 Y
A3 X
A2 PRIORITY
A1 ENABLE X1
Use:
• Displays simple string with no data variables in a window defined by IF_ASSIGN.
T This is a legacy component that supports graphical terminal applications that were
created before the Screen Editor became available. The Screen Editor does not use this
component.
Function:
• If:
− A1 = 0, then X = 0 display of the string not enabled

− A1 = 1, then X = 1 display of the string enabled
• A2 = Display priority of the string
• A3–A4 position the string in the window defined by IF_ASSIGN:
− A3 = Y-axis starting position, in pixels, of the string

− A4 = X-axis starting position, in pixels, of the string
• A5 = color of string font
• A6 = Type of string font
• A8 = String pointer for the text string, assigned using the Text Editor
302 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Valid connections
Pin Type Pin Type
A1 BOOL X1 BOOL
A2 UINT
A3 FILE
A4 TEXT
A5–A8 ALL
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 303

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
String with 4 Variables
A12 VAR1
A11 VAR2
A10 VAR3
A9 VAR4
A8 STRING
A7 FILE
A6 FONT
A5 COLOR
A4 X
A3 Y
A2 PRIORITY
A1 ENABLE X1
Use:
• Displays a string with four variable data values in a window defined by IF_ASSIGN.
• You can use IF_STRING-OUT if you do not need to specify string position, color, and
font.
T This is a legacy component provided to support graphical terminal applications that were
component.
Function:
• If:

• A3–A4 position the string in the window defined by IF_ASSIGN:
− A3 = Y-axis starting position, in pixels, of the string

− A4 = X-axis starting position, in pixels, of the string
304 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
• A5 = color of string font
• A6 = Type of string font
• A9–A12 = String variables, assigned using the Text Editor

Valid connections
Pin Type Pin Type
A1 BOOL X1 BOOL
A2 UINT
A3–A4 INT
A5 COL
A6 FONT
A7 FILE
A8 TEXT
A9–A12 ALL
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 305

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Basic String with 4 Variables

A8 VAR1
A7 VAR2
A6 VAR3
A5 VAR4
A4 STRING
A3 FILE
A2 PRIORITY
A1 ENABLE X1
Use:
• Displays a string with four variable data values in a window defined by IF_ASSIGN.
• Use IF_STRING-OUT when you need to specify string position, color, and font.
component.
Function:
• If:


Valid connections
Pin Type Pin Type
A1 BOOL X1 BOOL
A2 UINT
A3 FILE
A4 TEXT
A5–A8 ALL
306 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Basic String with 8 Variables
A12 VAR1
A11 VAR2
A10 VAR3
A9 VAR4
A8 VAR5
A7 VAR6
A6 VAR7
A5 VAR8
A4 STRING
A3 FILE
A2 PRIORITY
A1 ENABLE X1
Use:
• Displays a string with eight variable data values in a window defined by IF_ASSIGN.
component.
Function:
• If:

10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 307

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Valid connections
Pin Type Pin Type
A1 BOOL X1 BOOL
A2 UINT
A3 FILE
A4 TEXT
A5–A8 ALL
308 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Text Set
Click
Open Text Set
A1
Use:
• Attaches an external file containing multiple language format definitions to the

application.
T This is a legacy component provided to support graphical terminal applications that

were created before the Screen Editor became available. The Screen Editor does not
use this component.
Function:
• A1 = Defines the language to be used in the user’s application
• S1 = Alias name of the text definition file
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 309

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Close Text Set
Use:
• Ends text definition function.
component.
Function:
• Use with the Open Text Set component
310 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Language Definition Input

?
X1
LANG
Use:
• Combine with the Select Language component to enable switching between the
languages displayed in a PLUS+1 graphical terminal.
− Example—Select Language on page 313 shows how to use this component with
the Select Language component.
− See Define Screen Page/Switch between Different Languages on page 400 for
detailed information on using this component with the Screen Editor.
Function:
• ? = Language as defined in the Text Groups tab of the Screen Editor

Valid connections
— — X1 LANG
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 311

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Select Language
A1 SELECT LANGUAGE
Use:
• Combine with the Language Definition Input component to enable switching

between the languages displayed in a PLUS+1 graphical terminal.
− The following example shows how to use this component with the Language
Definition Input component.
− See Define Screen Page/Switch between Different Languages on page 400 for
detailed information on using this component with the Screen Editor.
Function:
• A1 = Language as defined in the Text Groups tab of the Screen Editor

Valid connections
A1 LANG — —
312 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Example—Select Language
Inputs
Soft_Buttons
Sw_Soft1 Match language names with language names in Screen Editor tab
German Place to the left of Define Screen page

LANG English SELECT LANGUAGE
LANG
LANG
Define Areas
Area_Page1
Data
Soft_Buttons
Scrn_Cntrl1 Define Screen
Sft Btns Screen_Page1
CAN_0
CAN Out Data
Screen Library tab in Screen Editor
Match language names

with Select Language names
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 313

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Define Areas Page

Define Areas
Area_Page1
Data
T Installing the hardware files for a PLUS+1 graphical display (such as the DP600) in the
Project Manager tab makes this component available.
T The File menu’s Import Page and Import Block commands do not work with this
component. Importing a Define Areas block into a new project strips the block of its
contents.
Use:
• Define the areas that appear in a PLUS+1 graphical terminal.
For more information about using this page, see Screen Editor on page 317.
Define Screen Page

Define Screen
Screen_Page1
Data
T Installing the hardware files for a PLUS+1 graphical display (such as the DP600) in the
Project Manager tab makes this component available.
T The File menu’s Import Page and Import Block commands do not work with this
component. Importing a Define Screen block into a new project strips the block of its
contents.
Use:
• Define the contents that appear in a PLUS+1 graphical terminal screen areas.
For more information about using this page, see Screen Editor on page 317.
314 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Application Log
Language Definition Input

?
X1
LANG
Select Language
A1 SELECT LANGUAGE
Define Application Log Areas Page

D e f i n e APPAreas
AppLog_Page1
Data
Define Application Log Page

D e f i n e APPLog
AppLog_Page1
Data
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 315

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Components
Page
Basic Page
Basic_Page
In1 Out1
In2 Out2
Use:
• A generic block—use as a starting point when creating your own blocks.
316 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
This chapter documents the PLUS+1 Screen Editor. The PLUS+1 GUIDE release 2.0.3 (and
later) includes the Screen Editor.
The Screen Editor creates applications for Sauer-Danfoss PLUS+1 graphical terminals such
as the DP600.
For more information about using the elements described here to create an application
for a PLUS+1 GUIDE graphical terminal, see Screen Editor—How To on page 379.
Chapter contents About the Screen Editor........................................................................................................................... 318

Screen Editor Elements............................................................................................................................. 319
Define Areas Page ...................................................................................................................................... 321
Define Areas Page/Inspector Tab.......................................................................................................... 323
Define Screen Page/Assign Screen Areas........................................................................................... 330
Define Screen Page/Add Library Items ............................................................................................... 332
Define Screen Page/Inspector Tab ....................................................................................................... 333
Define Screen Page/Image Register..................................................................................................... 339
Define Screen Page/Text Register......................................................................................................... 342
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 317

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
About the Screen Editor

The Screen Editor consists of a:
• Define Areas page.
• Define Screens page.
• Basic Page.
You use these pages to define the:
• Screen areas that appear in the graphical terminal.
• Contents—such as 256-color bitmap images and text—of each Screen Area.
• Signals (after you have ported signals to these pages) that control the display of
individual screen elements.
The Define Areas page, Define Screen page, and Basic Page are available in the
Components tab of PLUS+1 GUIDE release 2.0.3 (and later). You drag these pages into the
Application page of the graphical terminal template when creating a graphical
application.
Typical Graphical Terminal
1 5
15
2 mp/h 6
3 7
10
rpm x 1000
4 8
ESC OK
The preceding figure shows a typical graphical terminal.
The Screen Editor defined the:
• Tan and aqua Screen Areas.
• 256-color bitmap images and text that appears in each Screen Area.
• Signals—from buttons and external sources—that control the display of each Screen
Area and its contents.
T The Screen Editor can manipulate (rotate, turn on and off) 256-color bitmap images but
it cannot create them. To create bitmap images, you need a pixel-editing program such
as Paint Shop™ Pro® or Adobe Photoshop® Elements.
318 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
Screen Editor Elements

Screen AreasDefine
in Screen Areas page
Screen Area contentsDefine
in Define Screens page
1 5
15
2 mp/h 6 ButtonsPut control
logic in Basic pages
3 7
10
rpm x 1000
4 8
ESC OK
Application page
Define Areas page

Basic page
Define Areas Page

Define Screen Page
Basic page
Define Screen page Basic Page
Callouts in this figure identify:
• The basic elements in a typical graphical terminal screen display.
• The Define Areas page, Define Screen page, and Basic Page that define and control
these elements. You place these three pages in the Application page of the graphical
terminal template.
Start a Screen Editor Project on page 380 describes how to install a graphical terminal
template and add these pages to the template’s Application page.
Screen Editor elements

Item Description
Application page You create most of an application for a graphical terminal in this page.
The template that you use must match the graphical terminal for which you are creating an application.
You create a graphical terminal application using a Define Screen page, a Define Areas page, and Basic
pages. You select these pages in the Components tab and drag them into the Application page.
The Inputs bus brings signals from graphical terminal buttons and other sources to these pages.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 319

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
Screen Editor elements

Item Description
Define Areas Page Use the tools that display when you enter this page to create the Screen Areas that appear on the screen of
your graphical terminal.
A Screen Area is the background against which images, lines, and text appear.
Use the tools in the Define Areas page to define the position of each Screen Area, as well as the Screen Area’s
size and color.
A Screen Area can fill all or part of the graphical terminal’s screen.
After you bring signals to the Define Areas page, use the editing tools within this page to select the signals
that enable the display of Screen Areas.
The Define Areas page does not support sub-buses. Always use a main bus to bring signals to this page.
The File menu’s Import commands do not work with this component. Importing this component into a new
project strips the component of its contents.
Define Screen Page Use the tools that display when you enter this page to define the contents of each Screen Area.
The contents of each Screen Area include bitmap images, lines, and text.
(Before you can define the contents of a Screen Area, you must first use the Define Areas page to create the
Screen Area.)
Use the tools in the Define Screen page to define the appearance and position of each item that appears in a
Screen Area.
After you bring signals to the Define Screen page, use the editing tools on this page to select the signals that
control the behavior of items in Screen Areas.
Use signals to show and hide items, move and rotate items, and display changing numeric values.
The Define Screen page does not support sub-buses. Always use a main bus to bring signals to this page.
The File menu’s Import commands do not work with this component. Importing this component into a new
project strips the component of its contents.
Basic Page Use this page as a container for the logic that controls the display of Screen Areas and the items in the Screen
Areas.
This page is available for your programming convenience. It is an empty page except for input and output
ports.
320 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
Define Areas Page
Enter
Click to display tools
Click Editor buttons

Layout panel
Click
Assign
Screen area
Screen Area properties
The preceding figure shows the tools—tabs, panes, and buttons—within the Define
Areas page that you use to create Screen Areas. These tools display when you first enter
the Define Areas page.
(The Screen Library tab also displays but is not used when creating Screen Areas. The
figure here does not show this tab.)
The Define Areas page does not support sub-buses. Always use a main bus to bring
signals to this page.
T You must assign an HWPortName in the Inspector tab before you can create a Screen
Area.
T The File menu’s Import Page and Import Block commands do not work with the
Define Areas block. Importing a Define Areas block into a new project strips the block
of its contents.
Define Areas page

Item Description
Port Manager tab Use this tab to manage Screen Areas.

Areas—Click for a tree view of all the Screen Areas assigned to a hardware port. The HWPortName in the Inspector tab
shows the port assignment of all the Screen Areas in the tree.
Click a Screen Area name to see its properties in the Inspector tab and to move the area to the front of the Layout pane.
SingleWireEntry—Not used here.
BusEntries—Click for a tree view of all the signals available on the Define Areas page’s Data bus port.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 321

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
Define Areas page

Item Description
Inspector tab Use this tab to manage the properties of Screen Areas.
Layout pane Use to layout Screen Areas. Drag as needed to resize and reposition Screen Areas placed in this pane.
When you click a Screen Area in this pane, the Area moves to the front, the Port Manager tab highlights its name, and the
Inspector tab shows its properties.
Right-click a Screen Area to open a pop-up menu with Delete, Move Backward, and Move Forward commands.
Use the Move Backward and Move Forward commands to change the Inspector tab’s Order property.
Editor buttons The size of your monitor determines the row in which these buttons appear.
Close Click to return to the Application page.
Options Click to open the Options window.

Use this window to control the Layout pane’s grids and the transparency of items placed on Screen Areas.
Zoom Zooms the Layout pane.

In/Out
322 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
Define Areas Page/Inspector Tab
Use this tab to manage the properties of Screen Areas.
To view the properties of a Screen Area, click the Screen Area name listed in the Port
Manager tab or click the Screen Area in the Layout pane.
Define Areas page/Inspector tab

Item Description
HWPortName Becomes available after you click Areas1 in the Port Manager tab.
The HWPortName selection that you click in the pull-down list sets the port type and maximum pixel size of all
Screen Areas in the Areas1 tree.
Selecting an HWPort Name makes other properties in the Inspector tab available.
File name The name of the Screen Area.
Order Indicates the display order of a Screen Area when several Screen Areas simultaneously have an Enable
property that has a true Entry signal or a Value that is True.
The order in which you assign Screen Areas in the Port Manager tab initially sets the front-to-back Order
property.
A Screen Area with an Order property of 1 displays in front of a Screen Area with an Order property of 2; a
Screen Area with an Order property of 2 displays in front of a Screen Area with an Order property of 3.
To change the Order property, right-click a Screen Area. In the pop-up menu that opens, click the Move
Forward or Move Backward command.
A signal-enabled Screen Area always displays in front of a true-enabled Screen Area.
Color Signal—Click to select a signal to control the Screen Area color.

Constant—Click to see a list of standard colors. Double-click to open a standard Windows palette from which
you can select a color.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 323

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
Define Areas page/Inspector tab

Item Description
Enable Enables the display of a Screen Area.

Signal—Click to select a signal from the pull-down list.
A true signal brings this screen to the front of the display pane.
A true signal makes the results of changed Color, Upper left corner, and Lower right corner properties visible.
Constant—Click True or False.
A True Screen Area displays in front until a signal-enabled Screen Area receives a true signal.
A False selection disables the display of the Screen Area. You cannot select this screen.
Upper left corner Defines the upper left corner position of a Screen Area.
Upper left corner—Sets the upper left corner X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) pixel positions of a Screen Area.
Signal—Click to select a signal to control the position of the upper-left corner.
Because disabled pixels remain visible until overwritten by the pixels in another Screen Area, you need a
background Screen Area to see the effects of shrinking a Screen Area.
Constant—Click to set fixed values the position of the upper-left corner.
Dragging a Screen Area in the Layout pane also changes these corner values.
Lower right corner Defines the lower right corner position of a Screen Area.
Lower right corner—Sets the lower right corner X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) pixel positions of a Screen Area.
Signal—Click to select signals to control the position of the lower-right corner.
Constant—Click to set fixed values for the position of the lower-right corner.
324 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
Define Areas Page/About the Enable Property

The Inspector tab’s Enable property selections set the display properties of Screen Areas.
• A signal-enabled Screen Area:
− Stays invisible after you power on the graphical terminal and becomes visible
when its enabling signal becomes true.
− Moves to the front whenever its enabling signal becomes true.

• A true-enabled Screen Area is always in front until a Screen Area that is signal-enabled
gets a true signal.
Press Press
1
File2
5 1
File2 5 1
File2 5
2 6 2 6 2 6
File3 File3 File3

3 7 3 7 3 7
File1 File1 File1

4 8 4 8 4 8
ESC OK ESC OK ESC OK
1. Data.SW_SOFT1 = True. 2. Data.SW_SOFT1 = False. 3. Data.SW_SOFT1 = False.

Data.SW_SOFT2 = False. Data.SW_SOFT2 = True. Data.SW_SOFT2 = False.
(File3 = Value of True.)
The preceding figure shows how a single true-enabled Screen Area works with two signal-
enabled Screen Areas.
Note the Enable settings in the Inspector tab for each Screen Area.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 325

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
Press Press Press
1
File2 5 1
File2
5 1
File2
5
2 6 2 6 2 6
File3 File3 File3

3 7 3 7 3 7
File1 File1 File1
4 8 4 8 4 8
ESC OK ESC OK ESC OK
1. Data.SW_SOFT1 = True. 2. Data.SW_SOFT1 = False. 3. Data.SW_SOFT1 = False.

Data.SW_SOFT2 = False. Data.SW_SOFT2 = True. Data.SW_SOFT2 = False.
Data.SW_SOFT3 = False. Data.SW_SOFT3 = False. Data.SW_SOFT3 = True.
The preceding figure shows how three signal-enabled Screen Areas work together.
Note the Enable settings in the Inspector tab for each Screen Area.
326 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
Define Areas Page/About the Order Property

The Inspector tab’s Order property sets the front-to-back display order of Screen Areas
when two or more areas simultaneously have an Enable:
• Signal that is true.
• Value that is True.
(See Define Areas Page/About the Enable Property on page 325 for more about
Enable properties.)
The order in which you assign Screen Areas in the Port Manager tab initially sets the
front-to-back Order.
Sets Screen Area order
1
File2 5
2
File1 File3
6
3 7
4 8
ESC OK
File1, File2, and File3 = Value of True.
The preceding figure shows the display order of three true-enabled Screen Areas.
To change the Order property, right-click a Screen Area in the Layout pane. In the pop-up
menu that opens, click the Move Forward or Move Backward command.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 327

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
True-enabled Screen Area

Signal-enabled Screen Areas
1
File2 5
2 File1 6
File3
3 7
4 8
ESC OK
File1 = Value of True.

Data.SW_SOFT1 = True.
Data.SW_SOFT2 = True.
The preceding figure shows the display order of three Screen Areas where:
• The File1 Screen Area is true-enabled.
• The File2 and File3 Screen Areas are signal-enabled and both have true signals.
Signal-enabled Screen Areas that have true signals display:
• In front of true-enabled Screen Areas.
• In a front-to-back order set by their Order property.
328 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
Define Areas Page/About the Corner Property

0 400
X-axis
Y-axis
240
The preceding figure shows the effect of the Inspector tab’s Upper left corner and Lower
right corner properties on the size and position of a Screen Area.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 329

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
Define Screen Page
Enter
Click to display tools
Click Editor buttons
Right-click Select
Layout panel
When you enter the Define Screen page for the first time, this page displays the tools that
you need to assign the Screen Areas that you created in the Define Areas page described
on page 321.
Once you assign your first Screen Area, the tools that enable you to drag items from the
Screen Library tab (not shown here) into Screen Areas become available. Define Screen
Page/Add Library Items on page 332 describes these tools.
The Define Screen page does not support sub-buses. Always use a main bus to bring
signals to this page.
T The File menu’s Import Page and Import Block commands do not work with the
Define Screens block. Importing a Define Screens block into a new project strips the
block of its contents.
Define Screen page/Assign Screen areas

Item Description
Screen Manager tab Use this tab to assign the Screen Areas that you created in the Define Areas page to a hardware port.
Screen_Page1—Click for a tree view of the Screen Areas assigned to the PortName selected in the Inspector tab.
Click a Screen Area name in the tree to bring the area to the front of the Layout pane.
SingleWireEntry—Not used here.
BusEntries—Click for a tree view of all the signals available at the Define Screen page’s Data port.
Inspector tab This tab assigns the Screen Areas in the Screen1 tree to a hardware port.
330 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
Define Screen page/Assign Screen areas

Item Description
Layout pane Displays the Screen Areas added to the Screen1 tree.
(You must return to the Define Areas page if you need to change the property of a Screen Area, such its Color,
Enable, or Corner properties.)
Click a Screen Area to bring the area to the front and highlight its name in the Screen Manager tab.
Editor buttons The size of your monitor determines the row in which these buttons appear.
Close Click to return to the Application page.
Preview Click for a preview of the layout as it will look in the graphical terminal.
The preview temporarily overrides Options window settings.
Options Click to open the Options window.

Use this window to control the Layout pane’s grid and transparency settings.
Zoom In/ Zooms the Layout pane.

Zoom Out
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 331

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
Define Screen Page/Add Library Items

Screen Area name
Screen Area item
Layout panel
Properties Preview
Once you assign a Screen Area to a port, the Define Screen page displays more tools.
You use these tools to drag items from the Screen Library tab—such as Shapes, Images,
and Texts—into Screen Areas and to then manage the properties of these items.
Define Screen page/add Library items

Item Description
Screen Manager Use this tab to manage the contents of each Screen Area.
tab Click a Screen Area name for a tree view of all the library items that you assign to the selected area.
Click Screen Area items in this tab to see their properties in the Inspector tab.
Right-click items in this tree to open pop-up menus that have Cut, Copy, Delete, and Paste commands.
Inspector tab Use this tab to manage the properties of items placed in Screen Areas.
Layout pane Drag library items from the Screen Library tab into Screen Areas placed here.
Click a Screen Area to bring the area to the front and highlight its name in the Screen Manager tab.
Click a library item to see its properties in the Inspector tab. The Screen Manager tab highlights the name of the selected
item.
Screen Library tab Displays a tree view of a library of Shapes, Images, Texts, and HWComponents that you can add to Screen Areas.
Use the Image Register pane to add to the library of available Images.
Preview Displays a preview of bitmap Images.
332 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
Define Screen Page/Inspector Tab
Use this tab to manage the properties of the library items that you add to Screen Areas.
To view the properties of a library item, click the item name in the Screen Manager tab or
click the item itself in the Layout pane.
Different types of library items have different properties, so that the type of item you
select determines the properties displayed by the Inspector tab.
See Define Screen Page/About Screen Item Properties on page 335 for a list of the
properties of Shapes, Images, Texts, and HWComponents.
Define Screen page/Inspector tab

Item Description
ID Used for internal identification purposes. You cannot change this value.
Order Indicates the front-to-back display order of overlapping library items when library items simultaneously have an Enable with
a true Signal or a Constant that is True.
An item with an Order of 1 displays in front of a library item with an Order of 2.
The sequence in which you drag a library item into the Layout pane sets its initial Order.
To change a library item’s Order, right-click the item. In the pop-up menu that displays, click the Move Forward or Move
Backward command.
Begin point X—Sets the starting y-axis (horizontal) position, in pixels, of a Line.
Y—Sets the starting y-axis (vertical) position, in pixels, of a Line.
(You select Line from the Shapes tree in the Screen Library tab.)
End point X—Sets the ending x-axis (horizontal) position, in pixels, of a Line.
Y—Sets the ending y-axis (vertical) position, in pixels, of a Line.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 333

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
Define Screen page/Inspector tab

Item Description
Width Sets the top-to-bottom thickness, in pixels, of a Line drawn on the horizontal x-axis.
Sets the side-to-side thickness, in pixels, of a Line drawn on the vertical y-axis.
Color Sets the color property of the library item.

Click Signal to select a signal from a list of signals to set the color.
Click Constant to select a color from a list of colors. Double-click Constant to select a color from a standard Windows color
palette.
Font Sets the font property of Texts taken from the Screen Library.
Enable Enables the display of library items.
Reference Sets the X-axis and Y-axis coordinates of the small blue cross displayed on Images and HWComponents library items.
position All vertical, horizontal, and rotational movements of the library item take place with reference to this point.
Reference point in the Image Register pane sets the position of this cross.
Priority Determines which library item displays when two or more items simultaneously have an Enable with a true Signal.
When you enable two or more items, the graphic terminal only displays the item (or items) with the highest Priority.
Lower Priority numbers give library items higher display priorities, with 0 giving an item the highest display priority.
Rotation Rotates Images and HWComponents library items.

All rotational movements take place with reference to the small blue cross that displays on these library items.
Reference point in the Image Register pane sets the position of this cross.
Apply rotational values between 0 and 359°.
Visible Outputs a true Boolean signal when a library item becomes visible.
To be visible, a library item must have a true Screen Area, a true Enable property, and a Priority that is higher than or equal to
the Priority of any other library item in the same Screen Area.
(You must connect a wire to the Data bus to be able to output this signal.)
334 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
Define Screen Page/About Screen Item Properties

Different types of library items have different properties. This table lists of the properties of
Shapes, Images, Texts, and HWComponents.
Properties of Screen Library tab items

Library Items
Property Shapes Images Text HW Components
Begin point √ — — —
Color √ √ √ √
Enable √ √ √ √
End point √ — — —
Font — — √ —
ID — √ √ √
Reference position — √ — √
Order √ √ √ √
Priority √ — √ √
Rotation — √ — √
Starting point — — √ —
Visible √ √ √ √
Width √ — — —
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 335

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
Define Screen Page/About the Order Property

The Inspector tab has Order and Enable properties that work together to produce
different display results.
In the following example the:
• Low Oil Pressure! text has an Order of 1, with Enable properties that change.
• Red background has an Order of 2, with Enable properties that change.
1 5
2 6
Low Oil Pressure! (text) Low Oil Pressure! Red background
3 7
4 8
ESC OK
Order and Enable properties

Item Order Enable Result
Low Oil Pressure! 1 Constant

Constant display, with alert text in front of background bar.
Red background 2 Constant
Low Oil Pressure! 1 Signal Constant display of background bar.

Red background 2 Constant Alert text only displays in front of background bar when its signal becomes true.
Low Oil Pressure! 1 Signal Alert text and background bar only display when their signals become true.
Red background 2 Signal Alert text displays in front of background bar when both signals are true.
Low Oil Pressure! 1 Constant Constant display of alert text.
Red background 2 Signal Background bar displays behind alert text when its signal becomes true.
336 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
Define Screen Page/About the Color Property

The Inspector tab has a Color property that allows you to set the color through a
Constant or through a Signal.
When setting the color through a Signal, use a Multi-character Constant component to
output red, green, and blue (RGB) color values.
Use the ten-character scheme shown below when setting individual RGB values.
Place holder
Blue value
Green value
Red value
Hexadecimal prefix
0x FF FF 00 00
COLOR
Two-character hexadecimal values set the red, green, and blue values of the color where:
• A hexadecimal value of FF equals a decimal value of 255.
• A hexadecimal value of 00 equals a decimal value of 0.
Color examples
Red Value Green Value Blue Value
Constant Hex Decimal Hex Decimal Hex Decimal Color
FF 255 00 00 00 00 Red
00 00 FF 255 00 00 Green
00 00 00 00 FF 255 Blue
FF 255 FF 255 00 00 Aqua
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 337

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
Define Screen Page/About the Priority Property

The Inspector tab has a Priority property that determines which library item displays
when two or more items simultaneously have an Enable with a true Signal.
When you enable two or more items, the display terminal only shows the item (or items)
with the higher Priority.
• An item with a Priority of 0 displays before an item with a Priority of 1.
• An item with a Priority of 1 displays before an item with a Priority of 2.

In the following example:
• The Low Oil Pressure, Dirty Air Filter, and Low Washer Fluid alerts all appear within
the same Screen Area.
• The alerts in order of importance are:
− Low Oil Pressure.

− Dirty Air Filter.
− Low Washer Fluid.
• Only the three alerts appear in this Screen Area.
• Each alert is a bitmap, composed of yellow text against a red background.
Priority example
Alert Enable Signal Status Priority Display
Low Oil Pressure True 0
Dirty Air Filter True 1 Low Oil Pressure
Low Washer Fluid True 2
Low Oil Pressure False 0
Dirty Air Filter True 1 Dirty Air Filter
Low Oil Pressure False 0
Dirty Air Filter False 1 Low Washer Fluid
338 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
Define Screen Page/Image Register
Right-click
Preview
Pixel color
Use the Image Register pane to add 8-bit bitmaps (BMP) to the Image tree in the Screen
Library tab.
Registering a bitmap image:
• Copies the selected bitmap to a file in the folder that contains the graphic project files.
This copied bitmap becomes the source of the registered image.
• Registers (defines) the display characteristics of the bitmap.
The Images tree in the Screen Library tab displays the name of the registered image.
The source bitmap itself remains unchanged.
Define Screen page/Image Register

Item Description
ID Used for identification purposes. You cannot change this value.
Path Displays the location of the registered image in the Screen Library tab’s Images tree.
Description Enter the reference name for the bitmap that you are registering.
This name displays in the Images tree when you click Save.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 339

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
Define Screen page/Image Register

Item Description
Image Displays the name of the source file, its image type, and its size in pixels.
Browse Click to display an Open window.

Locate and select the source bitmap file in this window. The Screen Editor copies the file that you select into the graphic project
folder.
Reference Sets an X-axis and Y-axis reference point on bitmap images.

point All vertical, horizontal, and rotational movements of the bitmap image take place with reference to this point.
Pixel origin Becomes available if your image has a single pixel with a unique color. Check to set the Reference point on this pixel.
Color depth Sets the color depth that the bitmap image displays.
Select Monochrome (1 bit) or 256 Colors (8 bit).
The 256 Colors (8 bit) selection is only available for 256-color source images.
Format Displays the compression technique used on the bitmap image.
Preview Displays a preview of the bitmap image.
Transparency Click to set what areas of the bitmap image are transparent.
Opaque—All pixels in the bitmap image are visible.
Lower left corner—All pixels with the same color as the pixel in the lower left corner of the bitmap image become transparent.
Click image—All pixels in the bitmap image that have the same color as the pixel that you click become transparent.
Pixel color—Displays the color of the selected pixel.
Palette Sets the color palette that the bitmap image uses.
Active in application—Uses a color palette previously defined in the application.
From OS—Uses the color palette defined in the hardware operating system.
From BMP—Uses the color palette from the BMP source file.
Save Registers the bitmap image.

The bitmap source file copies to the project folder. The Image tree in the Screen Library tab displays the name of the registered
image.
Close Closes the Image Register pane.
340 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
Define Screen Page/About the Reference Point
Sets reference point on image
Reference point
The Reference point sets an X-axis and Y-axis reference point on an image.
The default Reference point is the upper left corner of the image.
All movement in reference to this point
When you click an image in the Layout pane, a small blue cross identifies the Reference
point.
All vertical, horizontal, and rotational movements of the image take place with reference
to this point.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 341

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
Define Screen Page/Text Register
Languages in
each Text Group
Text Group
Languages Text Groups

in Text Group
Use the Text Register pane to add a Text Group to the Texts tree in the Screen Library
tab.
Registering a Text Group:
• Copies the strings in the Text Group to a file in the graphic project folder.
• Defines (registers) the display characteristics of the text string.
• Displays the Description name of the Text Group in the Screen Library tab’s Texts
tree.
Define Screen page/Text Register

Item Description
ID Used for identification purposes. You cannot change this value.
Preview font Sets the font and size of the string that displays in the Preview pane.
(This control does not set the font displayed by the graphical terminal. The Inspector tab’s Font property sets the font displayed
by the graphical terminal.)
Path Displays the location of Text Group within the Texts tree in the Screen Library tab.
Description Enter the name for the Text Group. This name appears in the Screen Library tab’s Texts tree when you click Save.
Click a Text Group name in the Texts tree to open the Text Register pane and view the strings in the group.
Languages Lists the different languages in which you can display the Text Group string.
Strings Enter the text that you want to display here.

Use c+‘ for line breaks.
Use the % print character to display data values in the string.
342 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
Define Screen page/Text Register

Item Description
Preview pane Provides a preview of your String entry.

(The Inspector tab’s Font property determines the font used by the graphical terminal when displaying the string.)
Save Registers the Text Group.

The strings in the group copy to a text file in the graphic project folder.
The Texts tree in the Screen Library tab displays the Description of the Text Group.
Close Closes the Text Register pane.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 343

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor
344 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
This chapter contains some basic “how-to” procedures for the PLUS+1 GUIDE program.
Chapter contents Select ...................................................................................................................................................... 346

Undo Your Mistakes........................................................................................................................... 346
Zoom with the Mouse....................................................................................................................... 347
Zoom with Keystrokes ...................................................................................................................... 347
Delete a Single Item .......................................................................................................................... 348
Delete Many Items ............................................................................................................................. 349
Delete a Signal-to-Bus Connection .............................................................................................. 350
Refresh a View ..................................................................................................................................... 351
View a Full Page .................................................................................................................................. 351
Pan a View by Right-Clicking and Dragging.............................................................................. 352
Pan a View by Right-Clicking.......................................................................................................... 352
Navigate an Application with Buttons ........................................................................................ 353
Navigate an Application with the Page Navigator tab .......................................................... 353
Show and Hide Panes ....................................................................................................................... 354
Install a Hardware Description....................................................................................................... 355
Change Properties with the Inspector Tab................................................................................ 357
Change Properties with the Pop-up Edit Window.................................................................. 358
Create a Page ....................................................................................................................................... 359
Page Creation Overview .......................................................................................................... 360
Page Creation Procedure......................................................................................................... 361
Page Interface Editor View—Toolbar .................................................................................. 363
Create a Read-only Parameters File ............................................................................................. 373
About the CSV Template File Format .................................................................................. 382
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 345

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
Select
Windows programs use an object-action paradigm: you first select an object and then you
select the action to apply to the object.
The PLUS+1 GUIDE program uses an action-object paradigm: you first select an action and
then you select the object of the action.
When working with the PLUS+1 GUIDE program, you:
1. Click to select an action.
2. Do the action.
3. Stop the action by either clicking another action or by pressing `.
Example: To add 3 Digit Autotype constants components to the Drawing Area:
1. In the Constant section of the Component tab, click 3 Digit Auto-type.
2. Each click in the Drawing Area adds another 3 Digit Auto-type component.
3. Stop adding these components by either clicking another action or with `.
Undo Your Mistakes
Undo Redo
Toolbar
Use the Undo and Redo buttons in the toolbar or the Setup menu’s Undo and Redo
commands to correct your mistakes.
T By default, the PLUS+1 GUIDE program enables the Undo and Redo functions. The
Options window enables and disables these functions.
The path to this window is Setup menu > Options > Options window > General.
346 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
Zoom with the Mouse

...
2 1
...
1 2
Zoom in Zoom out
Zoom level
To zoom using the mouse:

1. Right-click to locate the zoom center.
2. Right-click and drag to zoom in or out:
− Drag diagonally to the upper right to zoom in.

− Drag diagonally to the lower left to zoom out.
The Status bar shows the zoom level.
Zoom with Keystrokes

To zoom using keystrokes:
1. Right-click to locate the zoom center.
2. Zoom in or zoom out:
− M zooms in.
− W zooms out.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 347

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
Delete a Single Item
Displays for a single selection or multiple identical selections
4 4
Selected
action
1. In the toolbar, click the Delete button.
The Status bar shows that you have selected the delete action.
2. In the Drawing Area, click and drag to select the item that you want to delete.
The Attributes window displays when you select a single item or make multiple
selections of identical items (such as selecting three components).
3. Click OK to delete the selected item.
4. Press 4 to refresh your view of the Drawing Area.
348 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
Delete Many Items
* = Will be deleted
- = Will not be deleted
2
4
Selected
action
5 4
1. In the toolbar, click the Delete button.
2. In the Drawing Area, click and drag to select multiple items.
The Select Item Class window displays when select multiple items that belong to
more than one class (such as a component and a wire).
3. Use the Select Item Class to select the items that you want to delete.
− An asterisk (*) identifies a class of items that will be deleted.

− A dash (–) identifies a class of items that will not be deleted.
4. Click OK to delete items.
5. Press 4 to refresh your view of the Drawing Area.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 349

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
Delete a Signal-to-Bus Connection

Bus
Port Annotated text
Signal wire
A signal-to-bus connection consists of:
• A green signal wire.
• Annotated text that identifies the signal carried by the wire.
• A port where the signal wire enters the bus.
• A red signal bus.
Typically, when you delete a signal-to-bus connection, you want to keep the bus but
delete the wire, annotated text, and port.
* = Will be deleted
A - = Will not be deleted
C
D
B
E 4
Selected action
1. Delete the signal-to-bus connection at the bus without deleting the bus.
A. Click the Delete button in the toolbar.
B. Click and drag to select the signal connection items as shown.
Releasing the mouse displays a Select Item Class window that identifies, by class,
the items that you have selected.
350 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
C. In the Select Item Class window, click Toggle ON<-> OFF and click:
– An asterisk (*) next to Annotate Text.
– An asterisk (*) next to Port.
– A dash (-) next to WireBusSeg.
D. Click OK to delete the selected items.

E. Press 4 to refresh the Drawing Area view.
... B
A
C 4
2. Delete the remaining wire segment.
A. Click and drag to select the wire segment as shown.
Releasing the mouse displays an Attributes window that shows the attributes of
the wire that you selected.
B. Click OK to delete the selected wire.
C. Press 4 to refresh the Drawing Area view.

Repeat this step to delete any remaining wire segments.
Refresh a View
Press 4 to refresh your view of the Drawing Area.
View a Full Page

Press h to fit the entire page in the Drawing Area. A thin blue line (—) indicates the
boundaries of a page.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 351

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
Pan a View by Right-Clicking and Dragging
1
2
1. Right-click and drag the pointer straight in the direction that you want the page to
move.
A square appears where you right-click.
2. Release the mouse.
The area that was under the square now centers on your pointer.
Pan a View by Right-Clicking

Right-click your mouse in the direction that is opposite from the direction that you want
the page to move.
The farther you right-click from the center of the page, the more the page moves.
352 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
Navigate an Application with Buttons

Top Level page
1 or e
Inputs page
...
2
To leave a page: or L
• To enter a page:
1. Click the Enter Page button in the toolbar or press E.
2. Drag at a page port.
• To leave a page, click the Leave Page button in the toolbar or press l.
Navigate an Application with the Page Navigator tab

Top Level page
Inputs page
• To go directly to a page, click the page in the Page Navigator tab.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 353

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
Show and Hide Panes

This figure identifies the controls that show and hide panes in the PLUS+1 GUIDE
window. (Not all panes have the same controls that are shown in this figure.)
Panel Control buttons
Drag to undock
Click to close
Drag to dock
Default Downlock
Layout Upunlock
Drag to resize
• Click the Default Layout command in the View menu to display locked Manager,
Inspector, Compiler, and Selector panes in their default positions.
• Once you have clicked the Default Layout command, you can use the Pane Control
buttons or the Manager, Page Navigator, Inspector, Compiler Messages, and
Selector commands in the View menu to show and hide panes.
• To undock a pane from the PLUS+1 GUIDE window, drag the pane by its undocking
bar to separate it from the window.
• To dock a pane to the PLUS+1 GUIDE window, drag the pane by its title bar over the
window edge until it docks.
• To autohide a pane (show and hide with mouse movements), unlock the Pane Control
button. The pane will only display when you move the mouse to the edge of the pane.
354 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
Install a Hardware Description
1. Install the Hardware Description in the Project Manager tab.
A. Locate the Hardware Description for your PLUS+1 hardware model and drag it
from the Hardware tab into the Project Manager tab.
B. In the Project Manager tab, fully expand the Hardware Description tree.
C. In the Hardware tab, also fully expand the Hardware Description tree.
A
B
2. As needed, change the comment that describes the hardware to a comment that is
meaningful to you.
A. In the Project Manager tab, click the Hardware Description comment.
B. In the toolbar, click the Inspector button to display the Inspector pane.
C. In the Inspector pane Comment field, change the default Hardware Description
comment.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 355

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
3. Install and rename the Template.
A. Drag the Template from the Hardware tab to the Project Manager tab.
(You can also drag the Template and drop it into the Drawing Area.)
B. Use the Rename Main Module window to give the Default template a name that
is useful for you.
356 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
Change Properties with the Inspector Tab

A B
1. Display the properties of the item in the Inspector tab.
A. In the toolbar, click the Inspector button.
The Inspector tab displays.
B. Click the Query/Change button in the toolbar.
C. In the Drawing Area, click an item.
The Inspector tab displays the properties of the item.
A
A
B
2. Change the property of the item.
A. In the Inspector tab, click the property that you want to change.
B. Select or enter a new property value.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 357

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
Change Properties with the Pop-up Edit Window

1
Change the property of an item.
1. In the toolbar, click the Query/Change button.

2. In the Drawing Area, click the property that you want to change.
The pop-up Edit Value window displays.
3. Change the property value.
T By default, the PLUS+1 GUIDE program enables the Undo and Redo functions. The
Options window enables and disables these functions.
The path to this window is Setup menu > Options > Options window > General.
358 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
Create a Page
An application template contains pages. Pages in the template logically organize
functions such as inputs, parameters, outputs, as well as the application itself.
User-defined pages
You can add your own pages when you need to:
• Create more space in which to layout components.
• Reduce confusion and clutter.
• Logically organize functions.
• Create blocks of components that you can export and then import for reuse in other
applications.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 359

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
Page Creation Overview

Page Top View
Click to enter Page Interface Editor View
Click to enter Page View
Page View
Page Interface
Editor View
Import Block (*.SCS format file)
The preceding figure shows a Top View, Page View, and Page Interface Editor View of the
same page. You use these three page views—typically along with the Import Block
command—to create a page.
Page Creation overview

Item Description
Page Top View In this view, you connect wires and buses to the entries that you defined in the Page Interface Editor View.
Page View In this view, you add wire and bus ports. These ports connect to the entries that you defined in the Page Interface
Editor View.
You connect the components that you place in this page to these ports.
You can import blocks of components into this page and also drag individual items into this page from the
Component and Library tabs.
Import Block Use the File menu’s Import Block command to select an *.SCS file containing a block of components and import it
into the Page View.
(Use the File menu’s Export Block command to export selected items to an *.SCS format file.)
Page Interface Editor View Design the appearance of the page’s Top View here. Use the Page Interface Editor tools to draw page borders, add
wire and bus entries, and add text labels.
360 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
Page Creation Procedure
The following procedure creates the page shown in the preceding figure. This page has a
wire and a bus input and a wire and a bus output.
The contents of your page determine the number of inputs and outputs required on the
page that you create.
This procedure focuses on creating a page but not on adding contents to the page. Your
programming style determines when and how you add contents to the page.
Also see Page Guidelines on page 438 for suggestions about the layout of page elements
and port labeling.
1. Prepare to add a new page.

A. In the toolbar, click the Enter page button.
B. Drag at an entry port of the page in which you want to place a new page.
Typically, the Application page is the first place where you need to add a page.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 361

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
Stop
Start
2. Add a page.
A. In the Add menu, click Page.

B. Click and drag from the lower left to the upper right to add the page.
A Page Interface Editor toolbar
3. Go to the Page Interface Editor View.

You design the top view appearance of a page in the Page Interface Editor View.
A. In the toolbar, click the Enter page button.
B. Click and drag on a page border to enter the page.

C. In the toolbar, click the Top View button to enter the Page Interface Editor View.
The Page Interface Editor View displays a new toolbar. Use the buttons in this
toolbar to create the Top View of the page.
362 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
Page Interface Editor View—Toolbar
The Page Interface Editor View displays the preceding toolbar. The following table
describes the tools in this toolbar that you commonly use to create a page view.
Page Interface Editor toolbar—commonly used tools

Tool Use To
Move Move items.
Change Size Resize lines and move entries, @PAGENAMEs, and text.
Copy Copy items.
Query/Change Change entry names and the text in text entries.
Delete Delete items.
Entry Bring a wire carrying a single signal to a page.
Bus Entry Bring a bus carrying many signals to a page.
Line Draw a line between an entry and a page border.
Wide Line Draw the borders of a page.
Text Label entries.
Close Window Leave the Page Interface Editor.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 363

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
4. In the Page Interface Editor View, delete the page border.
A. In the toolbar, click the Delete button.

B. Drag on the page border. Dragging turns the page’s lines white and opens an
Attributes window.
C. In the <Rectangle> Attributes window, click OK.
A
C
B
Insertion point
D
Two grid offset
5. In the Page Interface Editor View, draw new, thick blue page borders and reposition
the @PAGENAME.
Do not delete @PAGENAME. @PAGENAME is a placeholder for a meaningful page

name that you will add in a future step.
A. In the toolbar, click the Wide Line button.

B. Click and drag to draw boundary lines.
Position the left vertical boundary two gridlines (5.0 mm) to the right and two
gridlines down from the entry point.
Always start and end page boundary lines on grid intersections.

C. In the toolbar, click the Move button.
D. Click @PAGENAME and move it to just below the top border of the page.
364 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
A
B
C
E `
D
6. In the Page Interface Editor View, add wire entries as needed.
A wire entry brings a signal to the border of a page.

To add bus entries, go the next step.
A. In the toolbar, click the Entry button.
(Note the button shown in the preceding figure. Do not confuse the Entry Bus
button and the Entry button.)
The <Entry> Change Attributes (Single Mode) window opens.
B. In the <Entry> Change Attributes (Single Mode) window’s EntryName, type the
name for the wire entry.
C. In the <Entry> Change Attributes (Single Mode) window, click OK.

D. Click to place the wire entry.
Place entries two grids from the page border.
E. Press `.
Repeat these substeps to add additional wires.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 365

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
A B
C
E `
7. In the Page Interface Editor View, add bus entries as needed.

A bus entry brings a bus to the border of a page.
A. In the toolbar, click the Entry Bus button.

(Note the button shown in the preceding figure. You can easily confuse the Entry
button and the Entry Bus button.)
The <Entry>Change Attributes (Single Mode) window opens.
B. In the <Entry> Change Attributes (Single Mode) window’s EntryName, type the
name that you want to give the bus entry.
C. In the <Entry> Change Attributes (Single Mode) window, click OK.

D. Click to place the bus entry.
Place entries two grids from the page border.
E. Press `.
Repeat these substeps to add additional bus entries.
366 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
A
B
8. In the Page Interface Editor View, draw lines between the entries and the page
borders.
These non-functional lines improve the top level appearance of a page.
A. In the toolbar, click the Line button.
B. Draw a line between each entry and the borders of the page.
A
B
D E
9. In the Page Interface Editor View, add a text label to each entry.
A. In the toolbar, click the Text button.
B. Click anywhere on the page.
The Text Attributes window opens.
C. In the Text Attributes window, type a text label name in the String field.
D. Click OK.
E. Click where you want to place the label.

Repeat these substeps to add text labels to all other entries.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 367

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
Click
Standard toolbar
10. Click the Stop button to leave the Page Interface Editor and return to the Page View.
11. In the Page View, add wire ports as needed.

A wire port brings a wire entry into the page.
To add a bus port, go to step 13.
A. In the toolbar, click the Port Wire button.
(Note the button shown in the preceding figure. You can easily confuse this
button with the Port Bus button.)
The Select Symbol – Schematics Design window opens.
B. In the Select Symbol – Schematics Design window, click

wp.Interface ->·· local.
C. In the Select Symbol-Schematics Design window, click Load.
368 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
E `
12. Place the wire port and select the wire entry that you want to port into the page.
A. Click to place the wire port.
The Select/Define Port Name window opens. This window lists the names of wire
entries that you created in the Page Interface Editor.
B. In the Select/Define Port Name window, click the wire entry that you want to
port into the page.
C. In the Select/Define Port Name window, click OK.
D. Draw a wire from the wire port and then press 9 to terminate the wire.
Repeat these substeps to add additional wire ports.

E. Press ` to stop adding wire ports.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 369

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
13. In the Page View, add bus ports as needed to the page.
A bus port brings an entry bus into the page.

A. In the toolbar, click the Port Bus button.
(Note the button shown in the preceding figure. You can easily confuse this
button with the Port Wire button.)
The Select Symbol – Schematics Design window opens.
B. In the Select Symbol – Schematics Design window, click

bp.Interface ->·· local.
C. In the Select Symbol-Schematics Design window, click Load.
370 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
B
C
E `
14. Place the bus port and select the bus entry that you want to bring into the page.
A. Click to place the bus port.
The Select/Define Port Name window opens. This box lists the bus entries that
you created in the Page Interface Editor.
B. In the Select/Define Port Name window, click the bus entry that you want to port
into the page.
C. In the Select/Define Port Name window, click OK.
D. Draw a bus from the bus port and then press 9 to terminate the bus.
Repeat these substeps to add additional bus ports.

E. Press ` to stop adding bus ports.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 371

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
Click
15. In the toolbar, click the Leave Page button to leave the Page View and go to the Top
View of the page.
D
16. In the Top View, give the page a name that is meaningful to you.
A. In the toolbar, click the Query/Change button.
B. Click Page1.
The Edit Page Name window displays.
372 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
Create a Read-only Parameters File

This procedure describes how to create a read-only parameters file.
A read-only parameters file is a downloadable lhx file with constant values that configure
an application.
A read-only parameter files is useful where, except for different configuration values, the
same logic controls a series of devices, such as a family of hydraulic motors.
Instead of creating a separate application for each device, you can create different read-
only parameters files to configure the same application for use with each device in the
series.
This procedure creates a read-only parameters file with the following values.
Read-only parameters
Name Signal Type Value
CalThldMin (Calibration Threshold Minimum) U16 5400
CalThldMax (Calibration Threshold Maximum) U16 8100
ThldMult (Threshold Multiplier) U16 1000
DfltThld (Default Threshold) U16 7500
FltDet (Fault Detect) BOOL 1 (1 =T; 0 =F)
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 373

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
1. Start the PLUS+1 GUIDE program.

2. Open the GUIDE project for which you want to create a read-only parameter lhx file.
T See Read-only Parameter on page 285 for more information about the components
used to create a read-only parameters file.
Changed from
TYPE to Setup_Values
Changed from
COMMENT to Mtr_Values
(Motor Values)
3. Create the logic needed to add read-only parameters to an application.
In this example:
− The PARAMETER OPEN component outputs a Boolean F until you download a

read-only parameters lhx file with a matching TYPE, parameter names, parameter
order, and data types.
F inputs to the Switch components cause these components to output 0 and F

values to the application.
− The PARAMETER OPEN component outputs a Boolean T when you download a

matching read-only parameters lhx file.
T inputs to the Switch components cause these components to apply the values
in the read-only parameters lhx file to the application.
374 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
4. Enable the read-only parameters feature.
A. In the Project Manager tab, click the *.SYS (kernel) file.
B. In the Inspector tab, click the button that appears in the Parameters property to
display the Edit System Parameters window.
C. In the Edit System Parameters window, click to ENABLE the Read-only

Parameters feature.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 375

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
Type names must match
C
D
5. Set the properties needed to create a read-only parameters lhx file.
A. In the Project Manager tab, right-click the Application Name (Motor Control in
this example) to display a pop-up menu.
B. In the pop-up menu, click Add New Read-only Parameter.
The Inspector tab shows the File Name of the *.exr conversion file.
C. In the Inspector tab, enter a TYPE name that matches the TYPE name used in the
PARAMETER OPEN component (Setup_Values in this example).
D. Press ‘.
376 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
6. Generate a CSV (Comma-Separated Value) template file.
A. Click the Compile All button.

The compile process generates a CSV template file and then aborts, displaying
ERROR 77 messages in the Error Messages tab. One error message displays for
each read-only parameter in the application.
The CSV template file has fields for each parameter, but no data types or values in
the fields.
In the next steps, you turn the CSV template file into a CSV source file by adding
values and saving the file under a new name. You then run a PLUS+1 process that
outputs the values in the CSV source file to a downloadable read-only parameters
lhx file.
These steps resolve the causes of ERROR 77 messages.
B. Click Close to close the Compile Progress window.
Warning
Do not compress (zip) your project files until you have resolved the causes of all ERROR 77
messages.
Zipping the project files with unresolved errors will corrupt the P1P format file. You will not be
able to reopen your project.
If you close a project with unresolved ERROR 77 messages, do not zip the project files.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 377

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
A
CSV template fileno data types or values
7. Browse to and open the CSV template file.
A. Browse to the project folder and locate the CSV template file.
The name of the CSV template file is DataTemplate_+TYPE.csv.
In this example, the TYPE of the PARAMETER OPEN component is Setup_Values.

The name of the CSV template file is DataTemplate_Setup_Values.csv.
B. Right-click the CSV template file and, using the pop-up menus, open the template
file with Microsoft Excel or Notepad.
See About the CSV Template File Format on page 382 for more information
about the format of the CSV template file.
378 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
CSV template fileno data types or values
Data type
Value
CSV source filedata types and values
Value (1 = T; 0 = F)
Data type
8. Create the CSV source file.
A. In the CSV template file, enter a data type and a value for each parameter.
Data types and values are required. Comments are optional.

B. Save the changes made to the CSV template under a different file name. This file
becomes the CSV source file.
In this example, changes made in the DataTemplate_Setup_Values.csv file get

saved to the DataTemplate_Setup_Values_1.csv file.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 379

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
A
B
Select CSV source file
9. Generate a downloadable read-only parameters lhx file.
A. In the toolbar, click the Generate Parameter button to display the Generate Read-
only Parameter File window.
B. In the Generate Read-only Parameter File window, click Generate Type.
C. In the Generate Read-only Parameter File window, click Browse to display the
Open window.
Use the Open window to select the CSV source file for the Data Values used in
the read-only parameters lhx file.
D. In the Generate Read-only Parameter File window, click Run.
An Information window with a NO ERRORS FOUND message displays if the

PLUS+1 GUIDE program successfully outputs the values in the CSV source file to
the read-only parameters lhx file.
By default, the name of the read-only parameters lhx file is
DataTemplate_+TYPE.lhx.
(To change the default file name, see OutputFileName on page 382.)
In this example, the TYPE of the PARAMETER OPEN component is Setup_Values.

The read-only parameters lhx file name is DataTemplate_Setup_Values.lhx.
380 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
Compile
Read-only parameters file

Application file
10. Compile the application.

The project now has two downloadable lhx files:
− An application file—Motor Control.lhx in this example.

The application file reserves controller memory locations for the read-only
parameters, with references to their TYPE, order, data types, and names.
Download this file first.
− A read-only parameters file—DataTemplate_SETUP_VALUES.lhx in this

example.
Download this file second.

To successfully download this file, references in this file to the order, data types,
and names of the parameters must match similar references in the controller’s
memory.
For more information about downloading lhx files, see the PLUS+1 Service Tool User
Manual.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 381

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
PLUS+1—How To
About the CSV Template File Format
The CSV template file has fields for each read-only parameter but no values in the fields.
You add values to the fields and save the file under a new name to create a CSV source file.
The CSV source file is the source for the downloadable, read-only parameters lhx file.
CSV template file format

Row Label Field Description
1 Format* Identifies the format of the read-only parameters file.
2 Type* Identifies the read-only parameter set, using the PARAMETER OPEN component’s TYPE value.
3 TypeFileName* Identifies the *EXR file used to generate the read-only parameters file.
4 OutputFileName Defines the name of downloadable read-only parameters lhx file that you generate with the Generate Read-
only Parameter File window.
As needed, enter a new output file name (in this example, replace DataTemplate_SETUP_VALUES.lhx).
5 VERSION Defines a version field that appears in PLUS+1 Service Tool program.
As needed, enter a version (in this example, replace Heavy Duty Motor).
6 ADDRESSMODE* The address mode as defined by the hardware.
7 DEFAULTTYPEDATA* The default data type as defined by the hardware.
8 MIN_DATASIZE* The value of the minimum data size as defined by the hardware.
9 – – – – –* Divides the file header from the data.
10 NAME*; SIGNALTYPE; Data header.

VALUE; COMMENT
11– Read-only parameters, generated from the parameter set in your application.
For each read-only parameter, enter a SIGNALTYPE (Data Type) and a VALUE.
As needed, enter an optional COMMENT. Comments do not become part of the read-only parameters lhx file.
*Do not change.
382 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Screen Editor—How To
This chapter contains some “how-to” procedures for the PLUS+1 GUIDE Screen Editor.
Chapter contents Start a Screen Editor Project ........................................................................................................... 384

Define Areas Page/Assign a Hardware Port .............................................................................. 387
Define Areas Page/Assign More Screen Areas.......................................................................... 388
Define Areas Page/Rename a Screen Area ................................................................................ 389
Define Areas Page/Delete a Screen Area.................................................................................... 390
Define Areas Page/Change Screen Area Properties ............................................................... 391
Define Areas Page/Initialize Signal-Enabled Screen Areas................................................... 393
Define Screen Page/Assign a Screen Area ................................................................................. 394
Define Screen Page/Delete a Screen Area ................................................................................. 395
Define Screen Page/Create Bar Graphs....................................................................................... 396
Define Screen Page/Create a Text Group................................................................................... 397
Define Screen Page/Use the Default Language Setting ....................................................... 399
How to Change the Default Language ............................................................................... 399
Define Screen Page/Switch between Different Languages................................................. 400
Define Screen Page/Display a Data Value.................................................................................. 401
Define Screen Page/Format a Data Value .................................................................................. 402
Define Screen Page/Display an Image List ................................................................................ 404
Define Screen Page/Display a Text List....................................................................................... 409
Define Screen Page/Install Additional Fonts ............................................................................ 414
Define Screen Page/Display a Non-Roman Alphabet............................................................ 420
Define Screen Page/Display Video ............................................................................................... 425
Define Screen Page/Print a Screen............................................................................................... 427
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 383

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Start a Screen Editor Project

The following procedure describes how to start a Screen Editor project. This project will
create an application for a PLUS+1 graphical terminal.
1. Install the most recent version (2.2.4 or later) of the PLUS+1 GUIDE program on your
PC.
2. Start the PLUS+1 program.
3. If you have already installed the hardware files for the graphical terminal, skip ahead
to step 6.
4. Install the hardware file for the graphical terminal for which you are creating an
application.
A. In the Setup menu, click Install Hardware.
B. In the Install Hardware window that opens, click Browse.
C. In the Select Hardware window that opens, locate and click the hardware file for
the graphical terminal.
D. In the Select Hardware window, click Open.
384 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
A Hardware file
5. Install the hardware file for the graphical terminal.
A. In the Install Hardware window, click Install. The selected hardware file installs
and the Hardware tab now displays the selected hardware file.
B. Click OK to close the Information window.
Optional: change name
6. Click and drag the hardware file and the template for the graphical terminal from the
A. In the Hardware tab, click to view all the items in the graphical terminal tree.
B. Drag the hardware file for the graphical terminal from the Hardware tab into the
Project Manager tab.
C. Drag the template file for the graphical terminal from the Hardware tab into the
Project tab. As needed, use the Replace Main Module window to rename the
module.
D. In the Replace Main Module window, click OK.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 385

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
The Drawing Area now displays the template in which you will create an
application for a graphical terminal. (Your template may look different.)
F
D
B E
F
7. Enter the Application page of the template and add Screen Editor pages.
This step adds the Define Areas page and the Define Screen page. All graphical
terminal applications that use the Screen Editor must have these two pages.
The Basic Page is provided for your convenience to contain the logic that controls
what the graphic terminal displays. You can add this page later.
Typically, you also add buses to bring Inputs signals to these pages. (See Screen
Editor Elements on page 319 for a fully “wired” example.)
A. In the toolbar, click the Enter Page button.
B. Drag at an Application page port to enter this page.
C. Click to view the Component tab.
D. In the Components tab, click to view all Display components.
E. Drag the Define Areas page into the Application page.
F. Drag the Define Screen page into the Application page.

386 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Define Areas Page/Assign a Hardware Port
Enter
1. Enter the Define Areas page.
Port pixel dimensions
Screen Area
2. Assign a hardware port.
A. In the Port Manager tab, click Area_Page1.
B. In the Inspector tab, click to select an HWPortName.
The Screen Editor adds a Screen Area to the Layout pane.
It resizes Layout pane to match the pixel dimensions of the HWPortName.
The Inspector tab displays the properties of the Screen Area, including its File
name.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 387

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Define Areas Page/Assign More Screen Areas

Assigning a hardware port (see Define Areas Page/Assign a Hardware Port on page 387)
automatically assigns the first Screen Area. Follow this procedure to assign more Screen
Areas.
Enter
B
A
New Screen Area
2. Add a Screen Area.
A. In the Port Manager tab, right-click Area_Page1.
B. In the pop-up menu that opens, click New Screen Area.

The Layout pane displays a new Screen Area.
The Inspector tab displays the properties of the new Screen Area, including its
File name.
Repeat this step to add more Screen Areas.
388 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Define Areas Page/Rename a Screen Area
Enter
A
New file name
C /
2. Change the name of a Screen Area.
A. In the Port Manager tab, click the Screen Area name that you want to change.
B. In the Inspector tab, type the new File name.
C. Press '.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 389

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Define Areas Page/Delete a Screen Area
Enter
2. Delete a Screen Area.
A. In the Port Manager tab, right-click the Screen Area that you want to delete.
B. In the pop-up menu that opens, click Delete.
C. In the Confirm window that opens, click Yes.
The Screen Area disappears from the Layout pane.

Repeat this step to delete other Screen Areas.
You cannot delete the last screen. One Screen Area always remains assigned to
the hardware port.
390 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Define Areas Page/Change Screen Area Properties

Route bus to page to make signals available
1. If you want to control properties with signals, you must route the bus containing the
desired signals to the Define Areas page to make these signals available.
Enter
3. To change a Screen Area property that is Constant, perform continue on to the next
step.
To control a Screen Area property through a Signal, perform step 5.
4. Change a screen property that is Constant.
A. In the Port Manager tab, click the Screen Area that has the property that you
want to change.
The Layout pane displays the selected Screen Area.
B. In the Inspector tab, click the Constant property that you want to change. Select
a new property from the list that displays.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 391

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
5. Control a screen property through a Signal.
A. In the Port Manager tab, click the Screen Area that has the property that you
want to control with a signal.
The Layout pane displays the selected Screen Area.
B. In the Inspector tab, click the Signal for the property that you want to control.
Select a signal from the list that displays.
392 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Define Areas Page/Initialize Signal-Enabled Screen Areas

You may want your graphical terminal to automatically display signal-enabled Screen
Areas on power up. On power-up, signal-enabled files (Screen Areas) stay invisible until
their enabling signals become true.
Multiple Screen Areas Display on Power Up
Off Delay: Holds all signal outputs

true for 150 ms after OS start.
Two Input Switch: Disables

inputs for 150 ms after OS start.
When you power up the graphical terminal, the logic in the preceding figure:
• Displays the Screen Areas enabled by the SW_SOFT1, SW_SOFT2, and SW_SOFT3
signals.
• Disables the SW_SOFT1, SW_SOFT2, and SW_SOFT3 inputs for 150 ms.
Screen Area with Company Logo Displays on Power Up
Off Delay:
Holds Logo_Scrn
signal true for 5 s after OS start
Negative Transition:
Two Input Switch: Makes SW_SOFT1 true
Disables inputs when 5 s off delay ends
for 5 s after OS start
When you power up the graphical terminal, the logic in the preceding figure:
• Displays the Screen Area enabled by the Logo_Scrn signal for five seconds.
• Disables the SW_SOFT1, SW_SOFT2, and SW_SOFT3 inputs for five seconds.
• Displays the Screen Area enabled by the SW_SOFT1 signal after five seconds.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 393
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Define Screen Page/Assign a Screen Area

Enter
1. Enter the Define Screen Page.
C
B
A
D
2. Assign a Screen Area.
A. In the Screen Manager tab, right-click Screen_Page1.
B. In the pop-up menu that opens, click Assign Screen Area.
C. In the Select Screen Area window that opens, click the Screen Area that you want
to assign.
This window lists all the Screen Areas that you created in the Screen Areas page.
D. In the Select Screen Area window, click OK.

The Layout pane displays the Screen Area that you just assigned.
The Layout pane also resizes to the pixel dimensions of the HWPortName that
you assigned in the Define Areas page.
Grayed-out items in the Screen Library tab become available as soon as you
assign the first Screen Area.
Repeat this step to assign more Screen Areas.
394 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Define Screen Page/Delete a Screen Area

Enter
1. Enter the Define Screen page.
2. Delete a Screen Area.
A. In the Screen Manager tab, right-click the Screen Area that you want to delete.
B. In the pop-up menu that opens, click Delete.
C. In the Confirm window that opens, click Yes.

The Screen Area disappears from the Layout pane.
Repeat this step to delete more Screen Areas.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 395

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Define Screen Page/Create Bar Graphs

The following figure and table lists the typical Inspector tab settings that you need to
create dynamic horizontal and vertical bar graphs using a Line.
You select a Line from the Shapes tree in the Screen Library tab.
• A horizontal bar graph changes size along its x-axis.
• A vertical bar graph changes size along its y-axis.
0 X-axis 400
0 Layout panel
WidthConstant
Y-axis
End point:
240 XConstant,
same as Begin point X value
YSignal
Begin point: End point:

XConstant XSignal
YConstant YConstant,
same as Begin point Y value
Begin point:
WidthConstant XConstant
YConstant
Horizontal Bar Graph Vertical Bar Graph
Basic inspector settings for bar graphs

Begin Point End Point
Bar Graph Type X Y X Y Width
Horizontal Constant Constant Signal Constant—same as y-axis Begin point Constant
Vertical Constant Constant Constant—same as x-axis Begin point Signal Constant
The horizontal bar graph shown in the preceding figure:
• Increases in length when the pixel value of its x-axis End point signal increases.
• Decreases in length when the pixel value of its x-axis End point signal decreases.
The vertical bar graph shown in the preceding figure:
• Increases in height when the pixel value of its y-axis End point signal decreases.
• Decreases in height when the pixel value of its y-axis End point signal increases.
396 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Define Screen Page/Create a Text Group
Parentheses () = default language
1. Define English as the default language for the Text Group.
(You can change the default language later. See Define Screen Page/Use the Default
Language Setting on page 399 for more information.)
A. In the Screen Library tab, right-click Texts.
B. In the pop-up menu that displays, click New Group.
2. If you do not need additional languages, skip ahead to step 4.
B Enter language name

Language list Text Group languages
Adds to Languages list

C
Deletes from Languages list
D
3. As needed, add additional languages to the Text Group.
A. Right-click Languages (English).
B. In the pop-up menu that displays, click Add.
C. Use the Languages window to add additional languages to the Text Group.
– Click the + button to display the Screen Editor window. Type the name of the
new language in this window and click OK.
– In the Languages window, click the languages that you want to add.
D. Click OK to add the selected languages to the Text Group.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 397

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
4. Open the Text Register pane.
A. In the Screen Library tab, right-click New Text Group.
B. In the pop-up menu that displays, click Text to open the Text Register pane.
Text Group
name
C D
5. Define the strings in the Text Group.
A. In Description, enter the reference name for the Text Group.
B. Enter the string in each of the Languages.
C. Click Save.
The Screen Library tab displays the Description name in the New Text Group
tree. (As needed, repeat these steps to add an additional Text Group.)
D. Click Close to close the Text Register pane.
398 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Define Screen Page/Use the Default Language Setting

Use the default language setting under the following conditions:
• Your application has Text Groups with multiple language strings.
• You want to create a separate download for each language.
• You do not want the end user to be able to switch between languages.
If you want the end user to be able to switch between languages, see Define Screen
Page/Switch between Different Languages on page 400.
How to Change the Default Language

To change the default language, perform the following steps:
2
New default language
1. In the Screen Library tab’s Languages tree, right-click the language that you want to
make the default language.
2. In the pop-up menu that opens, click Set as Default.
A download file created with a Swedish default language setting (as shown in the
preceding figure) only displays Swedish text strings.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 399

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Define Screen Page/Switch between Different Languages

Language Definition Input* Select Language*
Input switches languages
Place to right of
Select Language component
*Available in Display components
Languages names and Definition inputs must match
Use this figure as a guide when creating logic that switches languages if:
• Your application has Text Groups with multiple language strings;
• And you want the end user to be able to switch between different languages.
If you do not want the end user to be able to switch between languages, see Define
Screen Page/Use the Default Language Setting on page 399.
400 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Define Screen Page/Display a Data Value

Route bus to page to make data signals available
1. Route the bus containing the desired data signal or signals to the Define Screen page.
Enter
3. Use the Text Register pane to create and register a text string with a % print character.
(See Define Screen Page/Create a Text Group on page 397.)
4. Select the data value that you want to display.
A. Drag the registered text from the Screen Library tab into the Layout pane.
B. In the Screen Manager tab, click to expand the new T (ext) entry.
C. In the Screen Manager tab, click the dv DataValue.
D. In the Inspector tab, click the signal with the value that you want to display.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 401

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Define Screen Page/Format a Data Value

The following figure shows the elements used when displaying data values.
Print character Print character Print character
%d %+5d %05d
Conversion character Conversion character Conversion character
Formatting characters Formatting characters
• All data values require a:
− % print character.
− A conversion character that is appropriate for the data values that you want to
display.
• Use the formatting characters as needed to refine the appearance of the data.
Conversion character properties

Conversion
Character Display Data Type Positive Values Negative Values
d Decimal U8 S8 U16 S16 S32 Yes Yes
Ld Decimal U8 S8 U16 S16 S32 Yes Yes
li Decimal U8 S8 U16 S16 S32 Yes Yes
0 Octal U8 S8 U16 S16 S32 U32 Yes No
Lo Octal U8 S8 U16 S16 S32 U32 Yes No
x Hexadecimal, lower case U8 S8 U16 S16 S32 U32 Yes No
X Hexadecimal, upper case U8 S8 U16 S16 S32 U32 Yes No
Lx Hexadecimal, lower case U8 S8 U16 S16 S32 U32 Yes No
lX Hexadecimal, upper case U8 S8 U16 S16 S32 U32 Yes No
U Decimal U8 S8 U16 S16 S32 U32 Yes No
402 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Special formatting characters

Formatting
Character Description Examples
Space Puts a blank space before a positive displayed value and a - sign before a negative displayed value. Item 2
+ Puts a + sign before a positive displayed value and a – sign before a negative displayed value. Item 3
n Right justifies the displayed value, where n = maximum number of spaces that precede the value. Spaces Item 4
decrease as the value increases.
-n Left-justifies the displayed value, where n = maximum number of spaces that can follow the value. Spaces Item 5
decrease as the displayed value increases.
0n Sets the maximum number padding zeros that appear to the left of the displayed value, where n = number Item 6
of zeros.
# Alternate displayed value: ——

#o—octal output, with value preceded by an “0”
#X—uppercase hexadecimal output, with the value preceded by an 0X.
Formatting examples (S16 input)

Item Formatting Input Value Displayed Value Input Value Displayed Value Input Value Displayed Value
1 %d 0 0 111 111 -111 -111
2 %+d 0 +0 111 +111 -111 -111
3 %5d 0 0 111 111 -111 -111
4 %-5d 0 0 111 111 -111 -111
5 %05d 0 00000 111 00111 -111 -0111
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 403

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Define Screen Page/Display an Image List
This “how-to” assumes that you have assigned:
• A hardware port to your Define Areas block.
For more information, see Define Areas Page/Assign a Hardware Port on page 387.
• A Screen Area to your Define Screen block.
For more information, see Define Screen Page/Assign a Screen Area on page 394.
ImgLst_Enbl (BOOL)Enables the Image List component

Img_Slct (U8)Selects which image displays
1. Create the logic needed to control an Image List component.
Typically, this logic has:
− A Boolean signal that controls the Image List component’s Enable property.
In this example, the Image List component displays when the Boolean
ImgLst_Enbl (Image List Enable) signal is T.
− An integer signal that controls the Image List component’s ActiveIndex

property.
In this example, the value of the U8 Img_Slct (Image Select) signal controls which
image the Image List component displays.
Enter
2. Enter the Define Screen block.
404 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Image Register pane
Add images
3. Use the Image Register pane to add images to the Screen Library tab’s Image tree.
See Define Screen Page/Text Register on page 342 for more information about the
Image Register pane.
Image List entry
4. Drag an Image List component from the Screen Library tab into the Layout pane.
− Position the Image List component where you want the images to appear.
− The Screen Manager tab displays an Image List entry.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 405

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Display order
5. Drag images from the Screen Library tab on to the Image List component.
− Each image that you successfully add to the Image List component acquires the
layered border of the Image List component.
− The name of each image added to the Image List component appears in the
Image List tree in the Screen Manager tab.
406 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
6. Select an ActiveIndex signal to control which image the Image List component
displays.
A. In the Screen Manager tab, click the Image List entry.
B. In the Inspector tab, select a signal to control the Image List component’s
ActiveIndex property.
The order in which you added images to the Image List component sets the initial
Order value of each image.
(You can move an image in the Image List tree to change its Order.)
An image displays when its Order value equals the ActiveIndex value.
In this example, the Data.Img_Slct signal sets the ActiveIndex property.
– The Low Washer Fluid image has an Order value of 0. A Data.Img_Slct

signal value of 0 displays this image.
– The Check Taillight image has an Order value of 1. A Data.Img_Slct signal

value of 1 displays this image.
– The Dirty Oil Filter image has an Order value of 2. A Data.Img_Slct signal
– The Dirty Air Filter image has an Order value of 3. A Data.Img_Slct signal
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 407

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
7. Select an Enable signal to enable the display of the Image List component.
A. In the Screen Manager tab, click the Image List entry.
B. In the Inspector tab, select a signal to set the Enable property.
An Image List component displays when its Enable property is T.
In this example:
– The Data.ImgList_Enbl signal sets the Enable property.
– No images in the Image List component display unless the

Data.ImgList_Enbl signal is T.
To enable a constant display of the Image List component, set its Enable
property to a Constant value of T.
8. Compile the application and download it to the display terminal.
408 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Define Screen Page/Display a Text List
This “how-to” assumes that you have assigned:
TxtLst_Enbl (BOOL)Enables the Txt List component

Txt_Slct (U8)Selects the text that displays
1. Create the logic needed to control a Text List component.
Typically, this logic has:
− A Boolean signal that controls the Text List component’s Enable property.
In this example, the Text List component displays when the Boolean TxtLst_Enbl
(Text List Enable) signal is T.
− An integer signal that controls the Text List component’s ActiveIndex property.
In this example, the value of the U8 Txt_Slct (Text Select) signal selects which text
the Text List component displays.
Enter
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 409

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Text Register pane
Add text
3. Use the Text Register pane to add text to the Screen Library tab’s Texts tree.
Text Register pane.
Text List entry
4. Drag a Text List component from the Screen Library tab into the Layout pane.
− Position the Text List component where you want text to appear.
− The Screen Manager tab displays a Text List entry.
410 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Initial order
5. Drag text from the Screen Library tab on to the Text List component.
− Each text that you successfully add to the Text List component acquires the
layered border of the Text List component.
− The name of each text added to the Text List component appears under the Text
List entry in the Screen Manager tab.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 411

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
6. Select an ActiveIndex signal to control which text the Text List component displays.
A. In the Screen Manager tab, click the Text List entry.
B. In the Inspector tab, select a signal to control the Text List component’s
ActiveIndex property.
The order in which you added text to the Text List component sets the initial
Order value of each text.
(You can move a text in the Text List entry to change its Order.)
A text displays when its Order value equals the ActiveIndex value.
In this example, the Data.Txt_Slct signal sets the ActiveIndex property.
– The LF Tire Pressure Low text has an Order value of 0. A Data.Txt_Slct

signal value of 0 displays this text.
– The RF Tire Pressure Low text has an Order value of 1. A Data.Txt_Slct

– The LR Tire Pressure Low text has an Order value of 2. A Data.Txt_Slct

– The RR Tire Pressure Low text has an Order value of 3. A Data.Txt_Slct

412 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
7. Select an Enable signal to enable the display of the Text List component.
A. In the Screen Manager tab, click the Text List entry.
B. In the Inspector tab, select a signal to control the Text List component’s Enable
property.
A Text List component displays when its Enable property is T.
In this example:
– The Data.TxtList_Enbl signal sets the Text List component’s Enable

property.
– No Text List component texts display unless the Data.TxtList_Enbl signal is

T.
To enable a constant display of the Text List component, set its Enable property
to a Constant value of T.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 413

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Define Screen Page/Install Additional Fonts

The Screen Editor program comes with two standard system fonts. This “how-to” describes
how to make additional fonts available for use in your project.
T If your project needs to display a non-Roman alphabet such as Cyrillic, see Define
Screen Page/Display a Non-Roman Alphabet on page 420.
This how-to assumes that you have assigned:
Enter
414 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
B
A
Select script type
2. Make additional fonts available to the PLUS+1 GUIDE program.
This step installs fonts in a Fonts folder, which is located in the Program Files for the
PLUS+1 GUIDE program.
A. In the Setup menu, click Install Font to display the Install Font window.
B. In the Install Font window, click Select to display the Font window.
C. In the Font window, select the desired Font, Font style, and Size.
As needed, select the correct Script type if you are displaying a non-Roman
alphabet.
D. Close both the Font window and the Install Font window.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 415

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
3. Create a folder for the fonts that you will use in your project.
A. In the Screen Library tab, right-click the Fonts category.
In the pop-up menu that displays, click the New Folder command to create a new
folder.
B. Right-click the New Folder.
In the pop-up menu that displays, click the Rename command and give this folder
a useful name, such as Project Fonts.
416 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
A
Use to browse to the Fonts folder
4. Make additional fonts available to your current project.
This step copies the fonts that you installed in Fonts folder to the folder that you just
installed in the Screen Library tab.
A. Right-click the Project Fonts folder.
In the pop-up menu that displays, click the New > Font commands to display the
Add Font to Project window.
B. In the Add Font to Project window, click the font that you want to add.
C. Click Add to Project to add the font.

D. Repeat these substeps to add additional fonts.
E. Close the Add Font to Project window.
New font
The Screen Library tab displays the fonts that you added.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 417

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Text Register pane
Add text
Text Register pane.
6. Drag a text from the Screen Library tab into the Layout pane.
418 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
New font
7. Change the Font property of the text.
A. In the Layout pane, click the text.
B. In the Inspector tab, change the text’s Font property from a Constant system
font to a new project font.
8. Compile the project and download it to the display terminal.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 419

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Define Screen Page/Display a Non-Roman Alphabet

Sauer-Danfoss graphical terminals can display characters from non-Roman alphabets, such
as Cyrillic.
This “how-to” describes how to:
• Configure a Windows operating system to enter characters from a non-Roman

alphabet.
• Use the Text Register pane to enter text in a language that uses a non-Roman
alphabet.
1. In the Windows operating system, select a language for display.
A. Display the Advanced tab of the Regional and Language Options window.
Path: Start menu > Settings > Control Panel > Regional and Language Options
window > Advanced tab
B. In the Advanced tab of the Regional and Language Options window, select the
desired language.
C. In the Change Regional Options window that displays, click Yes to restart your
computer.
420 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
2. In the Windows operating system, select an Input language and a Keyboard

layout/IME for the language that you selected in step 1.
A. Display the Languages tab of the Regional and Language Options window.
Path: Start menu > Settings > Control Panel > Regional and Language Options
window > Languages tab
B. Click Details to display the Settings tab of the Text Services and Input
Languages window.
C. In the Text Services and Input Languages window, click Add to display the Add
Input Language window.
D. In the Add Input Language window, select an appropriate Input language and
Keyboard layout/IME.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 421

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
3. Display the Language bar on your desktop.
A. In the Text Services and Input Languages window, click Language Bar to
display the Language Bar Settings window.
B. In the Language Bar Settings window, click Show Language bar on the
desktop.
C. Close both the Language Bar Settings window and the Text Services and Input
Languages window.
4. To install fonts, see Define Screen Page/Install Additional Fonts on page 414.
5. After you have installed the necessary fonts, continue on to the next steps.
422 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
A. Use the Language Bar to select the correct keyboard input.
B. In the Text Register pane, use the Preview font pull-down menu to select the
correct preview font.
C. Еnter your text.
D. Click Save to save your changes. Click Close to close the Text Register pane.
7. Drag a text from the Screen Library tab into the Layout pane.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 423

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
A
New font
8. Change the Font property of the text.
A. In the Layout pane, click the text.
B. In the Inspector tab, change the text’s Font property from a Constant system
font to the font for the non-Roman alphabet.
9. Compile the project and download it to the display terminal.
424 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Define Screen Page/Display Video

Required hardware—PAL camera, 12–24 VDC power consumption

2. If you have not already done so, assign a port and a Screen Area.
A
B
3. Drag a Video input frame from the Screen Library tab into the Screen Area.
A. In the Screen Library tab, click to fully expand the HWComponents tree.
B. Drag the Video input frame into the upper left-hand corner of the Screen Area.
Video page
4. Leave the Screen Areas page and navigate to the Video page.
(The Video page is a sub-page within the Outputs page.)
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 425

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
False constant
True constant
5. In the Video page, replace the F(alse) constant on the DIGOUT with a T(rue) constant
to enable the video output.

7. Connect the PAL camera output to the graphical terminal.
426 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Define Screen Page/Print a Screen

Printing a screen allows you to:
• Capture an image of the graphical terminal’s screen and save this screen image in the
terminal’s random access memory (RAM).
• View your captured screen image.

The screen image remains in the terminal’s memory until you remove power from the
terminal or make another capture.
Implementing a print screen requires two signals:
• A Boolean signal, that when true, causes the graphical terminal to save a screen image
in its RAM. The Prnt Scrn (Print Screen) signal in the following procedure performs
this function.
• A Boolean signal that when true, causes the graphical terminal to display the saved
screen image. The Dsp Prnt Screen (Display Print Screen) signal in the following
procedure performs this function.
In the following procedure, inputs from the graphical terminal’s 1 and 2 buttons make
these two signals true. (Your application may use different inputs to make these
signals true.)
Application page
Carries signal to HW OUTPUTS bus
Contains control signals

for Define Screen page
1. Use the Screen Editor to create your graphical terminal application.
This application should have a:
− Basic Page to contain the control signals for the Define Screen page.
− A bus that carries a signal from this Basic Page to the HW Outputs bus.
2. Enter the Basic Page that contains signals for the Define Screen page.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 427

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
A
Basic Page
Captures image
Displays capture
3. In the Basic Page for the Define Screen page, wire the signals that capture the screen
image and display the captured screen image.
A. Wire and name the Prnt Scrn signal.

This signal, when true, causes the graphical terminal to capture a screen image
and save this image in its RAM.
B. Wire and name the Dsp Prnt Scrn signal.

This signal, when true, causes the graphical terminal to display the captured
screen image.
OS Out page
4. Leave the Basic Page and navigate to the OS Out page.
(The OS Out page is a sub-page within the Outputs page.)
428 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Delete
Wire
5. In the OS Out page, wire the Prnt Screen signal to the PRINT SCREEN output.
Capture displays here B
7. Drag a Print Screen frame from the Screen Library tab into the Layout pane and
then select the signal that enables the frame.
A. In the Screen Library tab, click to fully expand the HWComponents tab.
B. Drag the Print Screen frame into the Layout pane. Where you place the Print
Screen frame sets the position of the upper left-hand corner of the captured
screen image.
C. In the Inspector tab, click to Enable the display of the captured image with the
Dsp Prnt Scrn signal.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 429

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
8. Compile the application. Download the application to the graphical terminal.
Engine RPM 1800

Press to capture 1 5
Engine Temp (°C) 95
Capture
Engine Oil Press (bar) 2.8
2 6
Auger speed (rpm) 200
Hydraulic Press (bar) 75
3 7
4 8
Current values
ESC OK Captured screen image
Engine RPM 850

1 5
Engine Temp (°C) 90
Engine Oil Press (bar) 40
Press to display capture 2 Auger speed (rpm) 200 Engine RPM 1800 6
Hydraulic Press (bar) 35 Engine Temp (°C) 95
3 Engine Oil Press (bar) 2.8 7
Auger speed (rpm) 200
Hydraulic Press (bar) 75
4 8
ESC OK
9. Capture a screen image and then display the captured screen image.
A. On the graphical terminal, press button 1 to make the Prnt Scrn signal true.
The graphical terminal captures the screen image and saves it in RAM.
B. On the graphical terminal, press button 2 to make the Dsp Prnt Scrn signal true.
The graphical terminal displays the captured screen image. Where you placed the
Print Screen frame determines where the captured screen image displays.
430 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Keyboard Shortcuts and Command Modifiers
The chapter lists:
• The keyboard shortcuts for commonly used commands.
• The keyboard entries that that modify the following commands:
− Delete
− Copy
− Move
− Stretch
− Route Wire/Bus
Chapter contents Keyboard Shortcuts ................................................................................................................................... 432
Command Modifiers.................................................................................................................................. 434
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 431

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Keyboard Shortcuts
Keyboard shortcuts
Menu/Command Keyboard
File
New Project c+n
Open Project c+o
Save Project c+s
Import Block b
Export Block y
Edit
Undo 0
Redo —
Move m
Stretch S
Delete X
Copy/Repeat c
Query/Change q
View
Enter Page e
Leave Page l
Refresh 4
Set Center i
Recenter View c+3
Zoom
In M
Out W
Area 3
Fit Page h
432 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Keyboard shortcuts
Menu/Command Keyboard
Setup
Toggle Display Grid G
Add
Route Wire/Bus R
Tools
View Logical Net v
Help
PLUS+1 GUIDE Help 1
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 433

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Command Modifiers
Delete command modifiers
Modifier Keys Function
s++ Deletes separate, non-touching items on a page.

Press and hold these modifier keys while selecting items to be deleted. Release the keys.
To delete selections, click a selected item. In the Define or Select Item Class window that displays, click OK.
- Deselects items selected with s + +.

To deselect items, press this modifier key while dragging.
. Deletes the most recently added item in a group of selected items.

Press this modifier key while dragging to highlight the most recently added item in the selection.
In the Attributes window that displays, click OK to delete the item
x To delete a selected segment in a route, press this modifier key while selecting the segment.
Copy command modifiers

s++ Copies separate, non-touching items on a page.

Press and hold these modifier keys while selecting items to be copied. Release the keys.
To copy the selections, click a selected item.

Press this modifier key while dragging to deselect items.
. Copies the most recently added item in a group of selected items.

Press this modifier key while dragging to copy only the most recently added item in the selection.
Move command modifiers

6 Press this modifier key to rotate a selected item counterclockwise (ccw) in 1deg increments.
7 Press this modifier key to rotate a selected item ccw in 45 deg increments.
8 Press this modifier key to reflect a selected item 180 deg.
9 Press this modifier key to rotate a selected item ccw in 90 deg increments.
s++ Moves separate, non-contiguous items on a page.

Press and hold these modifier keys while selecting items to be moved. Release the keys.
To move selections, click a selected item.

. Moves the most recently added item in a group of selected items.

To move only the most recently added item in selection, press this modifier key while dragging.
434 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Stretch command modifiers

s++ Moves the most recently added item in a group of selected items.
To move only the most recently added item in selection, press this modifier key while dragging.

Route Wire/Bus command modifiers

9 Press this modifier key to stop adding segments to an unconnected route.
s Press and hold this modifier key to constrain routing to 90 or 180 deg.
h Highlights items that are connected to a route.

To highlight items that are connected to a route, press this modifier key while selecting the route.
Use Edit menu > Remove Highlighting command to remove highlighting.
j Press this modifier key to display a window in which you can change the route width.
K Press this modifier key to toggle between a bus and a wire.
n Press this modifier key while selecting a route to display a Nodes window that provides information about the route.
n Press this modifier key to start adding vertexes to a selected route.

Press 9 to stop adding vertexes.
n then x Pressnwhile selecting a route. Then press x to delete vertexes from the route.
Press 9 to stop deleting vertexes.
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 435

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
436 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Page Layout Guidelines
This chapter contains guidelines for laying out pages and labeling the ports on the pages.
Chapter contents Page Guidelines .......................................................................................................................................... 438

Port Label Abbreviations.......................................................................................................................... 440
Port Label Unit Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 441
10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z 437
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Page Guidelines
The following figure and table have layout guidelines that you can use when creating the
Page Top View in the Page Interface Editor.
1 My_Page_Name 3
2
Loop Tm Status
Max Fault
Min Data 1
4
Rst/Hld Data 2
5
Rst Val Alrm
6 Input Output
Top View layout guidelines

Item Element Layer/Color Alignment Other
1 Border SymbolBodyThin ——— Width: 1.0 mm
2 Pin SymbolBodyThin ——— Style: Solid
3 Page name PageName Center on block Title caps; underscore (_) spaces between words; do not
overrun function borders
4 Input label CoverSheet3 X left, Y center Title caps; do not underscore (_) spaces between words
5 Output label CoverSheet3 X right, Y center Title caps; do not underscore (_) spaces between words
6 Insertion point ——— ——— Always lower left
Text size guidelines

Item Font Cell Height Cell Width Stroke Width Relative Size
Page name Standard System 2.5000 1.6664 0.3750 100 %
Input label Standard System 2.5000 1.6664 0.3750 100 %
Output label Standard System 2.5000 1.6664 0.3750 100 %
438 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
D
C My_Page_Name
Loop Tm Status
Max Fault
Min Data 1
Rst/Hld Data 1
Rst Val Alrm
B
Input Output
A
I t
E E
F F
Detail: Input label and connection Detail: Output label and connection
Top View dimensions

Item Dimension Item Dimension Item Dimension
A 5.0 mm C 10.0 mm E 2.5 mm
B 5.0 mm D 3.75 mm F 3.75 mm
10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z 439
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Port Label Abbreviations

Port label abbreviations—2 wheel to Right
Label Abbreviation Label Abbreviation Label Abbreviation
2 wheel 2Whl Equal Eq Maximum Max
4 wheel 4Whl Error Err Middle, Mid Mid
Accelerate Acel Fail Fail Minimum Min
Alarm Alrm Fault Flt Negative Neg
All All Feedback Fdbk Neutral Neut
Angle Ang Forward Fwd Not Not
Average Avg Found Fnd Number Nmbr
Buzzer Buzz Four wheel 4Whl Operator Op
Bypass Bpas Frequency Freq Output Out
Calibrate Cal Ground Gnd Pack Pck
Clockwise CW Guard Grd Parameters Para
Command Cmd Handle Hndl Pass Pass
Control, Controller Ctrl High Hi Passive Pasv
Coordinate Cord Hold Hld Point Pt
Counterclockwise CCW Horn Hrn Positive Pos
Deadband Dbnd Hysteresis Hyst Potentiometer Pot
Decelerate Dcel Increase, Increment Inc Presence Prs
Decrease, Dec Initialize Init Propel Prpl

Decrement
Default Def Input* In Pulse Puls
Diameter Dia Left L Pulse pickup unit PPU
Digital Dig Left front LF Pulse width modulation PWM
Direction Dir Left rear LR Range Rnge
Displacement Disp Length Lgth Read Rd
Done Done Light Emitting Diode LED Reset Rst
Down Dn Loop Lp Reverse Rvs
Drive Drv Loop Time LpTm Revolution Rev
Enable Enbl Low Lo Right R
440 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Port label abbreviations—Right front to Write

Label Abbreviation Label Abbreviation Label Abbreviation
Right front Rf Solenoid Sol Time Tm
Right rear Rr Speed Spd Value Val
Sample Smpl Start Strt Wheel Whl
Select Slct Status Stat Width Wdth
Sensor Snsr Steer, Steering Str Work Wrk
Set Set Stop Stop Write Wr
Setpoint Stpt Sweep Swp
Soft Sft Switch Sw
Port Label Unit Abbreviations

Unit abbreviations
Item Abbreviation Item Abbreviation
ampere A miles per hour mph
centimeter cm millimeter mm
connector c minute (time) min
degree Deg ohm ohm
degree Celsius C pascal Pa
degree Fahrenheit F pin p
foot ft pounds per square inch psi
hertz Hz radian rad
hour h revolutions per minute rpm
inch in second (time) s
kilogram kg volt V
kilometers per hour kph watt W
meter m
10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z 441
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
442 10100824 Rev CA April 2007

z z
PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Index
BIT, 70
1 Bit Count component, 154
Bitwise
16 Input Capped component, 166
AND component, 147
16 Input component, 164
OR component, 148
XOR component, 149
2
2 Input Capped component, 161 C
2 Input component, 160
Call Module component, 264
Close Text Set component, 310
3 COLOR, 70
Color properties, about, 337
3 Character component, 137 Combine component, 205
3 Digit Autotype component, 134 Command modifiers, 431
Compare in Hysteresis Window component, 129
6 Compare with
Hysteresis High component, 123
6 Character component, 139, 140 Hysteresis Low component, 127
6 Digit Autotype component, 136 Hysteresis Middle component, 125
Component
Subtract, 81
A Component tab, 63
Absolute Value Capped component, 93 Components
Absolute Value component, 92 16 Input, 164
Add Capped, component, 86 16 Input Capped, 166
Add, component, 80 2 Input
Advanced Checkpoint component, 227 2 Input Capped, 161
Advanced Checkpoint with Namespace component, 3 Character, 137
227, 229 3 Digit Autotype, 134
AND component, 143 6 Character, 139, 140
Arc 6 Digit Autotype, 136
Cos component, 103 Absolute Value, 92
Sin component, 102 Absolute Value Capped, 93
Tan component, 104 Add, 80
Array Constant from File component, 195 Add, Capped, 86
Arrays, about, 74 Advanced Checkpoint, 227
Assign Advanced Checkpoint with Namespace, 227, 229
hardware port AND, 143
Define Areas page, 387, 388, 389, 390, 391 Arc Cos, 103
Arc Sin, 102
Arc Tan, 104
B Array Constant from File, 195
Basic page, about, 319 Basic String with 8 Variables, 307
Basic String Bit Count, 154
with 4 Variables component, 306 Bitwise
Basic String with 8 Variables component, 307 AND, 147
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 443

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Index
OR, 148 Less (than) or Equal (to), 120

XOR, 149 Limit, 115
Call Module, 264 Line, 295
Close Text Set, 310 Loop
Combine, 205 Counter, 170
Compare in Hysteresis Window, 129 Counter with Carry, 168
Compare with Loop Delay, 216
Hysteresis High, 123 LSB Position, 152
Hysteresis Low, 127 Max Value, 107
Hysteresis Middle, 125 Max Value Capped, 111
Configurable Module Connection, 262 Measure Period, 223
Copy of Array, 193 Median Value, 109
Cos, 100 Median Value Capped, 113
Data Flip-Flop, 157 Memory, 179
Decode Memory Capped, 181
4 BOOL, 199 Min Value, 108
8 BOOL, 202 Min Value Capped, 112
8 U8, 203 Module Bus Input, 263
Define Areas Page, 314 Module Bus Output, 263
Define Screen Page, 314 Module Input, 261
Define Window, 293 Module Output, 261
Delete Array Elements, 189 MSB Position, 153
Divide, 83 Multiply, 82
Divide Capped, 89 Multiply Capped, 88
Encode Negative Transition, 210
4 BOOL, 198 Non-volatile Memory
8, 200 Input Typed, 238
Equal (to), 121 Input/Output, 239
False, 133 Non-volatile Memory Dynamic, 257
Find Array, 194 Non-volatile Memory Dynamic Input, 259
Generate Compiler Error on Not Constant, 269 Non-volatile Memory Dynamic with Default, 254
Generate Compiler Error on Range, 268 NOT, 145
Generate Compiler Error on Type, 270 Not Equal (to), 122
Get Array Element, 184 Null, 141
Graphic, 297 Off Delay, 214
Graphic Label, 300 On Delay, 212
Greater (than), 117 Open Text Set, 309
Greater (than) or Equal (to), 119 OR, 144
Hardware Oscillator, 217
Input Typed, 233 Positive Transition, 209
Input/Output, 235, 236 Pulse, 219
Output, 234 Read Output from Hardware, 237
Initialize Hardware Output, 232 Read Output from Hardware Typed, 237
Insert Array Elements, 191 Receive CAN Filter, 245
Language Definition Input, 311 Receive CAN ID Mask, 247
Length of Array, 188 Retype, 207
Less (than), 118 Scale, 94
444 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Index
Scale Capped, 96 overflow conditions, 71

Select Language, 312 variable, about, 70
selecting, 346 Data value
Set Array Element, 186 how to display, 401
Set/Reset Latch, 155 how to format, 402
Shift Decode
Left, 150 4 BOOL component, 199
Right, 151 8 BOOL component, 202
Simple Checkpoint, 225 8 U8component, 203
Sine, 98 Default language, how to set, 399
Split, 204 Define Areas page
Square Root, 105 about, 319
String, 302 Corner properties, about, 329
String with 4 Variables, 304, 306 described, 321
Subtract Capped, 87 Enable properties, about, 325
Swap, 206 Order properties, about, 327
Text Label, 299 renaming Screen Area, how to, 389
Time Base, 221 Screen Area, how to assign, 388
Transition, 211 Define Areas Page component, 314
True, 132 Define Screen page
Up/Down Counter, 172 about, 319
Value, 175 bar graphs, how to create, 396
Value capped, 177 Color properties, about, 337
Value Initialization, 178 data value
XOR, 146 how to display, 401
Zero, 141 how to format, 402
ComponentsTan, 101 Default language, how to set, 399
Configurable Module Connection component, 262 Image Register, described, 339
Constant Insertion point properties, about, 341
3 Character, 137 languages, how to switch between, 400
3 Digit Autotype, 134 Order properties, about, 336
6 Character, 139, 140 print screen, how to, 427
6 Digit Autotype, 136 Priority properties, about, 338
False, 133 Screen Area, how to delete, 395
Null, 141 Text Group, how to create, 397
True, 132 Text Register, described, 342
Zero, 141 video, how to display, 425
Copy of Array component, 193 Define Screen Page component, 314
Corner properties, Define Areas page, about, 329 Define Window component, 293
Cos component, 100 Delete
Cos component, 100 signal-to-bus connection, how to, 350
Delete Array Elements component, 189
Divide Capped, component, 89
D Divide, component, 83
Data Flip-Flop component, 157
Data type
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 445

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Index
E I
Enable properties, about, 325 Image Register, described, 339
Encode Initialize Hardware Output component, 232
4 BOOL component, 198 Insert Array Elements component, 191
8 component, 200 Insertion point, about, 341
Equal (to) component, 121 Inspector
Error tab, 66
checking, 10 Inspector tab (Screen Editor)
Define Areas page, 323
Define Screen page, 333
F
False component, 133
Fault handling, 10
K
FILE, 70 Keyboard shortcuts, 431
Find Array component, 194
FONT, 70
Function tab, 64
L
Language Definition Input component, 311
G Languages, how to switch between, 400
Length of Array component, 188
Generate Compiler Error on Not Constant component, Less (than) component, 118
269 Less (than) or Equal (to) component, 120
Generate Compiler Error on Range component, 268 Limit component, 115
Generate Compiler Error on Type component, 270 Line component, 295
Get Array Element component, 184 Lock panels, 354
Graphic Loop
component, 297 Counter component, 170
Label component, 300 Counter with Carry component, 168
Greater (than) component, 117 Loop Delay component, 216
Greater (than) or Equal (to) component, 119 LSB Position component, 152
GUIDE window, 30
M
H Max Value Capped component, 111
Hardware Max Value component, 107
description, installing, 355 Measure Period component, 223
Input Typed component, 233 Median Value Capped component, 113
Input/Output component, 235, 236 Median Value component, 109
Output component, 234 Memory Capped component, 181
tab, 55 Memory component, 179
tab, about, 60 Menu bar, 36
Hardware tab Min Value Capped component, 112
Product Search window, 57 Min Value component, 108
Module
Bus Input component, 263
446 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Index
Bus Output component, 263 Panels, show and hide, 354

Input component, 261 Plotter Output, 47
Output component, 261 PORT, 70
MSB Position component, 153 Positive Transition component, 209
Multiply Capped, component, 88 Print. See Plotter Output
Multiply, component, 82 Print screen, how to, 427
My Blocks tab, 65 Priority properties, about, 338
Product Search window:, 57
Project Manager
N tab, about, 60
Names, about signal, 35 Pulse component, 219
Navigator tab, 62 PXO, 70
Negative Transition component, 210
Non-volatile Memory
Input Typed component, 238
R
Input/Output component, 239 Read Output from Hardware component, 237
Non-volatile Memory Dynamic component, 257 Read Output from Hardware Typed component, 237
Non-volatile Memory Dynamic Input, 259 Receive CAN Filter component, 245
Non-volatile Memory Dynamic with Default Receive CAN ID Mask component, 247
component, 254 Retype component, 207
NOT component, 145 Risk reduction, 10
Not Equal (to) component, 122
NULL, 70
Null component, 141
S
SB, 70
O Scale Capped component, 96
Scale component, 94
OBN, 70 Screen Area
Off Delay component, 214 how to
On Delay component, 212 assign, 388
Open Text Set component, 309 delete, 395
Options window rename, 389
General settings, 50, 51 Screen Editor
OR component, 144 about, 318
Order properties, about, 327, 336 basic elements, 319
Oscillator component, 217 Color properties, about, 337
Overflow conditions, about, 71 Define Areas page, 321
Define Areas page
Inspector tab, 323
P Define Areas page
Page assign a hardware port, how to, 387
how to create, 359 Define Areas page
how to create, procedure, 361 assign a hardware port, how to, 388
layout guidelines, 438 Define Areas page
Top View guidelines, 438 assign a hardware port, how to, 389
view, how to, 351 Define Areas page
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 447

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Index
assign a hardware port, how to, 390 SW, 70

Define Areas page Swap component, 206
assign a hardware port, how to, 391
Define Screen page
bar graphs, how to create, 396 T
data value T, 70
how to display, 401 Tab
how to format, 402 Component, 63
Default language, how to set, 399 Function, 64
Insertion point, about, 341 Hardware, 55, 60
Inspector tab, described, 333 Inspector, 66
languages, how to switch between, 400 Navigator, 62
print screen, how to, 427 Project Manager, 60
Text Group, how to create, 397 Tan component, 101
Text Register, about, 342 Tan, component, 101
video, how to display, 425 Template, application, about, 34
Enable properties, about, 325 Text
Image Register, about, 339 Group, how to create, 397
Order properties, about, 327, 336 Label, 70
Priority properties, about, 338 Label component, 299
Screen Area Register, described, 342
how to assign, 388 Time
how to delete, 395 Base, 70
how to rename, 389 Time Base component, 221
starting a project for, 384 TL, 70
Select Language component, 312 Toolbar, 43
Selecting components, how to, 346 Top View guidelines, 438
Service and Diagnostic Tool, about, 24 Transition component, 211
Set Array Element component, 186 True component, 132
Set/Reset Latch component, 155
Shift
Left component, 150 U
Right component, 151
UB, 70
Shortcuts, keyboard, 431
UL, 42, 58, 61, 70
Signal names, about, 35
Unlock panels, 354
Simple Checkpoint component, 225
Up/Down Counter component, 172
Sin component, 98
UW, 70
Sin, component, 98
SL, 70
Split component, 204 V
Square Root component, 105
Square Root, component, 105 Value capped component, 177
String Value component, 175
with 4 Variables component, 304 Value Initialization component, 178
String component, 302 Variable data types, about, 70
Subtract Capped, component, 87 Video, how to display, 425
Subtract, component, 81 View Logical Net window, 54
448 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

PLUS+1 GUIDE
User Manual
Index
W Z
Window, GUIDE, 30, 33 Zero component, 141
X
XOR component, 146
10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 449

Sauer-Danfoss Hydraulic Power Systems
OUR PRODUCTS - Market Leaders Worldwide
Hydrostatic transmissions Sauer-Danfoss is a comprehensive supplier providing complete

systems to the global mobile market.
Hydraulic power steering
Sauer-Danfoss serves markets such as agriculture, construction, road
Electric power steering
building, material handling, municipal, forestry, turf care, and many
Electrohydraulic power steering others.
Closed and open circuit axial piston We offer our customers optimum solutions for their needs and
pumps and motors develop new products and systems in close cooperation and
Gear pumps and motors partnership with them.
Bent axis motors Sauer-Danfoss specializes in integrating a full range of system

components to provide vehicle designers with the most advanced
Orbital motors total system design.
Transit mixer drives
Sauer-Danfoss provides comprehensive worldwide service for its products
Planetary compact gears through an extensive network of Global Service Partners
strategically located in all parts of the world.
Proportional valves
Directional spool valves
Cartridge valves Local address:
Sauer-Danfoss Inc.
Hydraulic integrated circuits 3500 Annapolis Lane North
Minneapolis, MN 55447, USA
Hydrostatic transaxles
Phone: +1 763 509-2000
Integrated systems Fax: +1 763 559-5769
Fan drive systems

Electrohydraulics
Microcontrollers and software
Sauer-Danfoss (US) Company Sauer-Danfoss ApS
Electric motors and inverters 2800 East 13th Street DK-6430 Nordborg, Denmark
Ames, IA 50010, USA Phone: +45 7488 4444
Joysticks and control handles Phone: +1 515 239-6000 Fax: +45 7488 4400
Displays Fax: +1 515 239-6618
Sensors Sauer-Danfoss GmbH & Co. OHG Sauer-Danfoss-Daikin LTD

Postfach 2460, D-24531 Neumünster Sannomiya Grand Bldg. 8F
Krokamp 35, D-24539 Neumünster, Germany 2-2-21 Isogami-dori, Chuo-ku
Phone: +49 4321 871-0 Kobe, Hyogo 651-0086, Japan
Fax: +49 4321 871 122 Phone: +81 78 231 5001
Fax: +81 78 231 5004
10100824 · Rev CA · March 2007 www.sauer-danfoss.com

Sauer Sdfjklmù

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sauer Sdfjklmù

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PLUS+1™ GUIDE

CONNECTOR MATES CONNECTOR MATES

Rev CA April 2007

©2007 Sauer-Danfoss. All rights reserved.

2 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

Risk Reduction .................................................................................................................................................. 9

Learning About the PLUS+1 GUIDE Program ......................................................................................11

PLUS+1 GUIDE Window ..............................................................................................................................29

Data Types .......................................................................................................................................................69

10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 3

4 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

Time Base ...................................................................................................................................... 221

10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 5

Screen Editor—How To.............................................................................................................................383

Define Screen Page/Create a Text Group................................................................................... 397

Keyboard Shortcuts and Command Modifiers ................................................................................. 431

Page Layout Guidelines............................................................................................................................ 437

Index ............................................................................................................................................................... 443

10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 7

8 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

Chapter contents Design and Test to Reduce Risks..............................................................................................................10

10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 9

Design and Test to Reduce Risks

• How the machine is normally used.

• Possible operator errors and their consequences.

• Industry safety standards and legal requirements.

− Joystick, sensor, and other inputs suddenly going to 100 % or to 0 %.

• The sequence of events and consequences of a fault or error.

• The sequence of events and consequences of an emergency stop.

• Individual inputs produce expected outputs.

• Fault handling and error checking work as designed.

10 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

These two lessons will help you to understand:

• How to create, open, and save a PLUS+1 GUIDE project.

• Major features of the PLUS+1 GUIDE window.

• How to use a PLUS+1 GUIDE template to create an application.

• Basic PLUS+1 GUIDE keystrokes and program commands.

• To complete Lesson 2, you need the following hardware:

− One MC024-010 PLUS+1 Controller (part 10100899).

Mouse/keyboard actions Left-click the mouse Right-click the mouse

Lesson 1: Create an Application ...............................................................................................................12

10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 11

Lesson 1: Create an Application

A. Start the PLUS+1 GUIDE program.

D. Click to display the Browse for Folder window.

12 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

B. Click Project Manager to display this tab.

C. Click to close the Inspector tab.

D. Click to close the Compiler pane.

E. Click to display the Hardware tab.

10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 13

D. In the Replace Main Module window, click OK to rename the module

14 10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007

A. In the toolbar, click the Enter Page button.

B. Drag at a port on the Application page to enter this page.

C. Click to display the Component tab.

The Component tab organizes components logically by function.

D. Click to view all the Constant components.

E. Drag these two Constant components into the Application page:

– 3 Digit Auto-type (two)

F. Click to view all the Transition and Time components.

10100824 · Rev CA · April 2007 15

You may find it useful to zoom in or out on your work.

DetailsCommunicator 9-Pin Connector